Daikin Applied Agz 025D 190D

Installation and Maintenance Manual IM 1165
Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Chiller Group: Chillers

.
Part Number: IM 1165
Date: March 20, 2013
Supersedes: July 30, 2012
AGZ025DH - AGZ190DH (Rev 0A), Packaged Chillers

AGZ025DB - AGZ190DB (Rev 0A), Chillers with Remote Evaporators
R-410A, 50/60 Hz
© 2013 Daikin Applied

Installation and Application Information . . . . . . . . 3 Physical Data - Packaged Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Physical Data - Remote Evaporator Units. . . . . . 50
Operating and Standby Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pressure Drop Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Unit Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
POE Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Electrical Data Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Chilled Water Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Field Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Start-up and Shut-down Procedures and Component
Glycol Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Remote Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Pre Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Piping and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Piping Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Wiring for AGZ-Remote Evaporators . . . . . . . 16 Component Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Evaporator Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Wind Baffles and Hail Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Dimensions - Packaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Warranty Registration Form (Scroll) . . . . . . . . . . 80
Dimensions - Remote Evaporator Models . . . . . . 29
Lifting and Mounting Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Hazard Identification
DANGER
Dangers indicate a hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
WARNING
Warnings indicate potentially hazardous situations, which can result in property damage, severe personal injury, or death if not avoided.
CAUTION
Cautions indicate potentially hazardous situations, which can result in personal injury or equipment damage if not avoided.
Modbus
*AHRI Certification and ETL Listing apply to 60Hz models only
Note: Cover photograph is an AGZ190D with standard protective coil grilles.

This manual covers AGZ-D vintage air cooled scroll chillers. For AGZ-C vintage models, see IM 1078, available at www.DaikinApplied.com.
Document: IM 1165
Issue Date: July 30, 2012
Revision Date: March 20, 2013
Replaces: NEW
©2013 Daikin. Illustrations and data cover the Daikin product at the time of publication and we reserve the right to make changes in design and
construction at anytime without notice. ™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies: LEED is a
registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council; BACnet from ASHRAE; LONMARK, LonTalk, LONWORKS, and the LONMARK logo
are managed, granted and used by LONMARK International under a license granted by Echelon Corporation; ElectroFin from AST ElectroFin
Inc.; Modbus from Schneider Electric; FanTrol, MicroTech III, Open Choice from Daikin.
2 IM 1165
Installation and Application Information
Chiller Nomenclature
A G Z XXX D H
Air-Cooled Application
Global Design H = Standard Packaged
Scroll Compressor
Nominal Tons
Design Vintage
WARNING
Installation is to be performed by qualified personnel who are familiar with local codes and regulations.
CAUTION
Sharp edges on unit and coil surfaces are a potential hazard to personal safety. Avoid contact with them.
General Description Figure 1: Suggested Pushing Arrangment

Blocking is required
Daikin Air-Cooled Water Chillers are complete, self- across full width
contained, automatic chiller units designed for outdoor
installation. Packaged units arecompletely assembled, factory
wired, charged, and tested. Remote evaporator units require
field refrigerant piping, pressure testing, evacuation, charging
with field-supplied refrigerant and field control wiring.
The electrical control center includes all equipment protection
and operating controls necessary for dependable automatic
operation.
Additional Manuals
This manual covers the installation, of dual circuit, AGZ-DH
Figure 2: Required Lifting Arrangement
packaged, scroll compressor chillers using R-410A.
Operating and maintenance information is contained in the Number of fans may vary
fro m this d iagram. The lifting
operating manual OMM 1087, available at S preader bars me thod will remain the sam e.
www.DaikinApplied.com. require d
(use caution)
Inspection
Check all items carefully against the bill of lading. Inspect all
units for damage upon arrival. Report shipping damage and
file a claim with the carrier. Check the unit nameplate before
unloading, making certain it agrees with the power supply
available. Daikin is not responsible for physical damage after
the unit leaves the factory.
Handling
Be careful to avoid rough handling of the unit. Do not push or All rigg ing l ocations
pull the unit from anything other than the base. Block the mu st be used.
pushing vehicle away from the unit to prevent damage to the
sheet metal cabinet and end frame (see Figure 1). CAUTION
To lift the unit, 2-1/2" (64mm) diameter lifting eyes are All lifting locations must be used to prevent damage to unit.
provided on the base of the unit. Arrange spreader bars and
cables to prevent damage to the condenser coils or cabinet (see
Figure 2).
IM 1165 3
Operating and Standby Limits
Table 1: Operating Limits
Maximum standby ambient temperature 130°F (55°C)
Maximum operating ambient temperature 105°F (40°C)
-with optional high ambient package (see information under High Ambient Operation‚ page 12 125°F (52°C)
Minimum operating ambient temperature (standard control) 35°F (2°C)
Minimum operating ambient temperature (with optional low-ambient control) -10°F (-23°C)
Leaving chilled water temperature 40°F to 60°F (2°C to 16°C)
Leaving chilled fluid temperatures (with anti-freeze) - Unloading is not permitted with fluid leaving
temperatures below 25°F (-4°C). When ambient air temperature is above 100º F, minimum leaving 15°F to 60°F (-9°C to 16°C)
chilled fluid temperature (with antifreeze) is 25°F (4°C)
Operating chilled water delta-T range 6 to 16°F (-14 to -9°C)
Maximum evaporator operating inlet fluid temperature 76°F (24°C)
Maximum evaporator non-operating inlet fluid temperature 100°F (38°C)
Unit Placement Air Clearance

AGZ units are for outdoor applications and can be mounted Daikin's advanced “W” coil design and open air-passage
either on a roof or at ground level. For roof mounted ends allow very close unit spacing and a small installation
applications, install the unit on a steel channel or I-beam frame footprint. The AGZ-D fans are canted inward and reduce
to support the unit above the roof. For ground level recirculation by directing discharge air to the center of the
applications, install the unit on a substantial base that will not unit, reducing the tendency to flow outward and spill over
settle. Use a one-piece concrete slab with footings extended into the coil inlet.
below the frost line. Be sure the foundation is level within 0.5” Sufficient clearance must be maintained between the unit and
(13mm) over its length and width. The foundation must be adjacent walls or other units to allow the required unit air flow
strong enough to support the weights listed in the Physical to reach the coils. Failure to do so will result in a capacity
Data Tables beginning on page 46. reduction and an increase in power consumption. No
Service Clearance obstructions are allowed above the unit at any height.
Sides: Minimum of 4 feet (1.22 m)
Spacing Requirements
Control panel end: Minimum of 4 feet In general, with a small performance penalty in some cases,
Opposite control panel: AGZ-D units can be spaced at four feet from other units or a
wall. Curves on the following pages give the minimum
• Minimum 4 feet on models 025 to 130;
clearance for different types of installations and also capacity
• 12 feet on models 140-190 (allows clearance to remove reduction and power increase if closer spacing is used.
the evaporator ).
4 IM 1165
Case 1: Wall on One Side Figure 5: Case 1 Adjustment Factors (AGZ140D-180D)
In this case a solid wall up to 24-feet is considered. (For walls Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ140-180)
higher than 24 ft., use the 24-foot values.) Also use these 2.0
charts for an adjacent building. For perforated screening walls,

use Case 4. Spacing is differentiated by unit size families. .
n
o
it
c
Figure 3: Wall on One Side of Unit u
d
e
R 1.0
y
it
c
a
p
a
C
%
0.0
0 8 12 16 20 24
Wall Height (ft)
Distance = 4ft Distance = 6ft
Power Increase (AGZ140-180)
2.0
e
s
a
e
r
c
n
I 1.0
Note: Maintain a minimum of 4-feet on all sides; except models r
e
140-190, which require 12-feet opposite the control w
o
P
panel to remove the evaporator. %
For models AGZ 025-100: use 4 feet from any height wall. For
models 110-190, use Performance Adjustment curves below. 0.0
0 8 12 16 20 24
Figure 4: Case 1 Adjustment Factors (AGZ110D-130D)
Wall Height (ft)
Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ110-130)
2.0
Figure 6: Case 1 Adjustment Factors (AGZ190D)

.
n Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ190)
o
it
c 2.0
u
d
e
R 1.0
ty
i .
c n
a io
p t
a c
C u
% d
e1.0
R
ty
i
0.0
c
a
0 8 12 16 20 24 p
a
C
Wall Height (ft) %
0.0
0 8 12 16 20 24
Power Increase (AGZ110-130) Wall Height (ft)
2.0
Distance = 4ft Distance = 5ft Distance = 7ft
Power Increase (AGZ190)

e 3.0
s
a
e
r
c
In 1.0
r
e e
w s 2.0
o a
P re
% c
n
I
r
e
w
o 1.0
P
0.0 %
0 8 12 16 20 24
Wall Height (ft)
Distance = 4ft Distance = 5ft 0.0

0 8 12 16 20 24
Wall Height (ft)
Distance = 4ft Distance = 5ft Distance = 7ft
IM 1165 5
Case 2: Two Units, Side-by-Side Case 3: Three or More Units, Side-by-Side
Maintain a minimum of 6-feet on all sides; except models 140- Maintain a minimum of 6-feet on all sides; except models 140-
190, which require 12-feet opposite the control panel to 190, which require 12-feet opposite the control panel to
remove the evaporator. remove the evaporator. For more than three units, allow an
additional 2-feet clearance between units.
Figure 7: Case 2 - Two units side by side
Figure 9: Case 3 - 3 units side by side
For models AGZ 025-100: use 4 feet between units. For

models 110-190, use Performance Adjustment chart in
Figure 8. Data is for the middle unit - with a unit on each side. See Case
Figure 8: Case 2 Adjustment Factors
2, page 6 for Adjustment Factors for the two outside units.
Full Load Capacity Reduction Figure 10: Case 3 Adjustment Factors
3.0
Full Load Capacity Reduction
6
2.5
n
io
t n5
c 2.0 o
it
u
d c4
e u
R d
ty
1.5 e
i R3
c y
a it
p 1.0 c
a a2
C p
% a
0.5 C
%1
0.0
4 5 6 8 0
4 5 6 8
Distance Between Units (ft)
AGZ075-100D AGZ110-130D AGZ140-180D AGZ190D Distance Between Units
AGZ075-100D AGZ110-130D AGZ140-180D AGZ190D
Power Increase
4.5
Power Increase
4.0 9
3.5 8
e
s e7
a3.0
re s
c2.5 a
n
I re 6
r2.0 c
e AGZ075-100D In 5
w r
o1.5 AGZ110-130D e4
P AGZ140-180D
w
o3
% 1.0 P
AGZ190D
0.5 %2
1
0.0
4 5 6 8 0
4 5 6 8
AGZ075-100D AGZ110-130D AGZ140-180D AGZ190D
6 IM 1165
Case 4: Open Screening Walls Case 5: Pit Installation
Decorative screening walls are often used to help conceal a Pit installations can cause operating problems resulting from
unit either on grade or on a rooftop. Design these walls such air recirculation and restriction, and require care that sufficient
that the combination of their open area and distance from the air clearance is provided, safety requirements are met and
unit do not require performance adjustment. It is assumed that service access is provided. Pit covers must have abundant open
the wall height is equal to or less than the unit height when area at least equal to the chiller footprint.A solid wall
mounted on its base support. If the wall height is greater than surrounding a unit is substantially a pit and this data should be
the unit height, see Case 5, Pit Installation, page 7. The used.
distance from the sides of the unit to the side walls must be
Steel grating is sometimes used to cover a pit to prevent
sufficient for service, such as opening control panel doors. For
accidental falls or trips into the pit. The grating material and
uneven wall spacing, the distance from the unit to each wall
installation design must be strong enough to prevent such
can be averaged providing no distance is less than 4 feet.
accidents, yet provide abundant open area to avoid
Values are based on walls on all four-sides.
recirculation problems. Have any pit installation reviewed by
Figure 11: Case 4 Adjustment Factor the Daikin sales representative prior to installation to ensure it
Wall Free Area vs. Distance has sufficient air-flow characteristics, and approved by the
8 installation design engineer to avoid risk of accident.
7
)t
f( Figure 12: Case 5 - Pit Installation
ti 6
n
U
to 5
ll
a
W4
m
ro
f 3
e
c
n
a
t 2
is
D
1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
% Open Wall Area
AGZ025-070 AGZ075-130 AGZ140-190
Figure 13: Case 5 Adjustment Factors (AGZ025D-070D)

Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ025-070)
6.0
5.0
n
io
t
c 4.0
u
d
e
R 3.0
ty
i
c
a
p 2.0
a
C
%
1.0
0.0
0 8 10 12 13 14
Depth of Pit (ft)
Distance = 4 ft Distance = 5 ft Distance = 6 ft

9.0
8.0
7.0
e 6.0
s
a
re
c 5.0
n
I
r
e 4.0
w
o
P
%3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
0 8 10 12 13 14
Depth of Pit (ft)
IM 1165 7
Figure 14: Case 5 Adjustment Factors (AGZ075D-130D) Figure 15: Case 5 Adjustment Factors (AGZ140D-190D)
Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ075-130) Full Load Capacity Reduction (AGZ140-190)
6.0
6
5.0
5 n
o
n ti
o c 4.0
ti u
d
c4 e
u R 3.0
d y
e it
R3 c
a
ty
i p 2.0
a
c C
a
p2 %
a 1.0
C
%1
0.0
0 8 10 12 13 14
0 Depth of Pit (ft)
0 8 10 12 13 14
Depth of Pit (ft)

Power Increase (AGZ075-130) 9.0
9.0 8.0
8.0
7.0
7.0 e
e s 6.0
s 6.0 a
a re
e c 5.0
r n
I
c 5.0 r
n
I e
r w4.0
e 4.0 o
w P
o %3.0
P 3.0
%
2.0
2.0
1.0 1.0
0.0 0.0
0 8 10 12 13 14 0 8 10 12 13 14
Depth
Distance = 6of
ft Pit / WallDistance
Height=(ft)
8 ft Distance = 10 ft
Depth of Pit / Wall Height (ft)
Distance = 5 ft Distance = 6 ft Distance = 8 ft POE Lubricants

! WARNING
Thus unit contains POE lubricants that must be handled carefully and the proper protective equipment (gloves, eye
protection, etc.) must be used when handling POE lubricant. POE must not come into contact with any surface or
material that might be harmed by POE, including certain polymers (e.g. PVC/CPVC and polycarbonate piping).
Chilled Water Piping points in the system to purge air out of the system. A vent
connection on top of the evaporator vessel allows air to be
IMPORTANT: Piping design must be provided by a qualified purged out of the evaporator. Purge air from the water system
Architect or Systems HVAC Design Engineer familiar with before unit start-up to provide adequate flow through the
piping design, as well as local codes and regulations. The evaporator.
manufacturer recommendations provided here are to be used
as a general guide, but do not replace system design by a Units with brazed-plate evaporators (030-130) must have a
qualified professional. drain connection provided in the bottom of the lower
connection pipe and a vent on the top of the upper connection
Install a cleanable perforated basket strainer with 0.062-inch pipe. These evaporators do not have drain or vent connections
perforations and 41% open area for models 030 to 130 and due to their construction.
0.125-inch perforations and 40% open area for models 150 to
200 in the water line just prior to the inlet of the evaporator. Install pressure gauges in the inlet and outlet water lines to the
An optional strainer kit is available for field mounting, see evaporator. Measure pressure drop through the evaporator and
following page. compare to flow as shown on page 57. Vibration eliminators
are recommended in both the supply and return water lines.
Design the water piping so the chilled water circulating pump
discharges into the evaporator inlet. Connect the return water Insulate chilled water piping to reduce heat loss and prevent
line to the evaporator inlet connection. Connect the supply condensation. Chillers not running in the winter should have
water line to the evaporator outlet connection. If not already their water systems thoroughly drained to protect against
factory installed, install a flow switch in the horizontal piping freezing. If the chiller operates year-round, or if the system is
of the supply (evaporator outlet) water line. not drained for the winter, protect the chilled water piping
exposed to outdoor temperature against freezing. Wrap the
Provide drain connections at low points in the system to permit lines with a heater cable and add proper amount of glycol to
complete drainage of the system. Locate air vents at the high the system to further protect the system.
8 IM 1165
Table 2: Strainer Data
Strainer Size Strainer Plus Pipe Strainer
Optional Inlet Strainer AGZ Model
(in.) Length (in.) Weight (lbs)
An inlet water strainer kit is available to be field-installed, 030-055 2.5 16.75 14
sized per Table 2 and with the pressure drop show in
060-130 3.0 17.75 20
Figure 16. This pressure drop must be accounted for in the
total system pressure drop. The kit consists of: 150-200 8.0 36.00 125
• (1) Y-type 40% open area strainer with 304 stainless Water Flow Limitations
steel perforated basket, Victaulic pipe connections and Constant Evaporator Flow
strainer cap The evaporator flow rates and pressure drops shown on page
• (1) Extension pipe with (2) Schrader fittings that can be page 57 are for full load design purposes. The maximum flow
used for a pressure gauge and thermal dispersion flow rate and pressure drop are based on a 6°F temperature drop.
switch. The pipe provides sufficient clearance from the Avoid higher flow rates with resulting lower temperature drops
evaporator for strainer basket removal. to prevent potential control problems resulting from very small
control bands and limited start up/shut off temperature
• (1) ½-inch blowdown valve
changes.
• (2) Victaulic clamps
The minimum flow and pressure drop is based on a full load
Figure 16: Strainer Pressure Drop evaporator temperature drop of 16°F. Evaporator flow rates
below the minimum values can result in laminar flow causing
freeze-up problems, scaling and poor control. Flow rates above
the maximum values will result in unacceptable pressure drops
and can cause excessive erosion, potentially leading to failure.
Variable Evaporator Flow
Reducing evaporator flow in proportion to load can reduce
system power consumption. The rate of flow change should be
a maximum of 10 percent of the flow per minute. For example,
if the maximum design flow is 200 gpm and it will be reduced
to a flow of 140 gpm, the change in flow is 60 gpm. Ten
percent of 200 gpm equals 20 gpm change per minute, or a
minimum of three minutes to go from maximum to minimum.
Do not reduce flow lower than the minimum flows listed in the
evaporator pressure drop section, page 57. The water flow
through the evaporator must remain between the minimum and
maximum values listed on page 57. If flow drops below the
minimum allowable, large reductions in heat transfer can
occur. If the flow exceeds the maximum rate, excessive
pressure drop and tube erosion can occur.
Figure 17: Typical Piping, Brazed-Plate Evaporator (models AGZ025D-130D)
IM 1165 9
Figure 18: Typical Piping, Shell and Tube Evaporator (models AGZ150D-200D)
Install piping with minimum bends and changes in elevation to should not be less than 4 minutes for normal variable
minimize pressure drop. The following issues should be cooling loads.
considered when designing and installing water piping: 11 When glycol is added to the water system for freeze
1 Vibration eliminators to reduce vibration and noise protection, the refrigerant suction pressure will be lower,
transmission to the building. cooling performance less, and water side pressure drop
2 Shutoff valves are required to isolate the unit from the greater. If the percentage of glycol is high, or if
piping during unit servicing. propylene is used instead of ethylene glycol, the added
pressure drop and loss of performance could be
3 Manual or automatic air vent valves at the high points of substantial. When Glycol or Ice are selected as Unit
the system. Drains must be installed at the lowest points Mode, the MicroTech II control will automatically reset
in the system. the available range for the Leaving Water Temperature,
4 Adequate water pressure must be maintained (expansion Freezestat and Evaporator Pressure settings.
tank or regulating valve). 12 Reset the freezestat setting to 6 degrees F (3.3 degrees C)
5 Temperature and pressure indicators located at the unit below the leaving chilled water setpoint temperature
are required to aid in unit servicing. after the glycol percentage is verified safe for the
6 Chilled water piping and strainer must be supported application. See the section titled "Glycol Solutions" on
independently from the unit. page 14 for additional information concerning glycol.
7 Flush the system water piping thoroughly before making 13 Perform a preliminary leak check before insulating the
connections to the unit evaporator. Design the water piping and filling the system.
piping so the chilled water circulating pump discharges 14 Piping insulation should include a vapor barrier to
into the evaporator inlet. prevent condensation and possible damage to the
8 The unit's evaporator has a thermostat and heater to building structure.
prevent freeze-up down to -20 F ( 29 C). The heating Drain Valves at Start-up
cable can be wired to a separate 115 V supply circuit. As
shipped from the factory, the heating cable is wired to the Model sizes AGZ 140 and larger have shell-and-tube
control circuit. All water piping to the unit must also be evaporators. They are drained of water in the factory and
protected to prevent freezing. shipped with evaporator drain plugs removed and stored in the
control panel or with an open ball valve in the drain holes. The
9 If the unit is used as a replacement chiller, flush the
drain is located on the bottom of the evaporator. Be sure to
system thoroughly before unit installation. Regular water
replace plugs or close the valves prior to filling the vessel with
analysis and chemical water treatment for the evaporator
fluid.
loop is recommended immediately at equipment start-up.
10 The total water volume in the system should be sufficient Water Connections
to prevent frequent "on-off" cycling. Turnover rate Bring water piping to the evaporator through the side between
the vertical supports. Provide taps for the connection of
10 IM 1165
pressure gauges and thermometers in the inlet and outlet lines. is drained in the winter or contains an adequate concentration
Check the inlet and outlet labels on the unit against the of anti-freeze, the disconnect switch to the evaporator heater
certified drawings supplied on the job and be sure the water must not be open.
piping is hooked up correctly. Contact the Daikin sales office Chilled Water Pump
if any discrepancies exist.
It is important that the chilled water pumps be wired to, and
System Water Volume Considerations controlled by, the chiller's microprocessor. When equipped
with optional dual pump output, the chiller controller has the
All chilled water systems need adequate time to recognize a
capability to selectively send the signal to a pump relay (by
load change, respond to that load change and stabilize, without
others) to start pump A or B or automatically alternate pump
undesirable short cycling of the compressors or loss of control.
selection and also has standby operation capability. The
In air conditioning systems, the potential for short cycling
controller will energize the pump whenever at least one circuit
usually exists when the building load falls below the minimum
on the chiller is enabled to run, whether there is a call for
chiller plant capacity or on close-coupled systems with very
cooling or not. This helps ensure proper unit start-up sequence.
small water volumes. Some of the things the designer should
The pump will also be turned on when the water temperature
consider when looking at water volume are the minimum
reaches 1°F below the Freeze Setpoint to help prevent
cooling load, the minimum chiller plant capacity during the
evaporator freeze-up. Connection points are shown in the Field
low load period and the desired cycle time for the
Wiring Diagram on page 59.
compressors. Assuming that there are no sudden load changes
and that the chiller plant has reasonable turndown, a rule of CAUTION
thumb of "gallons of water volume equal to two to three times
Adding glycol or draining the system is the recommended method of
the chilled water gpm flow rate" is often used. A storage tank freeze protection. If the chiller does not have the ability to control the
may have to be added to the system. pumps and the water system is not drained in temperatures below
freezing, catastrophic evaporator failure may occur.
BAS should enable chiller only when there is a cooling
demand. Failure to allow pump control by the chiller may cause the
Evaporator Freeze Protection following problems:
1 If any device other than the chiller attempts to start the
Evaporator freeze-up can be a concern in the application of air-
chiller without first starting the pump, the chiller will
cooled water chillers. To protect against freeze-up, insulation
lock out on the No Flow alarm and require manual reset.
and electric heaters are furnished with the unit. Models 140
through 190 have immersion heaters with a thermostat; models 2 If the chiller evaporator water temperature drops below
025 through 130 have an external plate heater and thermostat. the “Freeze setpoint” the chiller will attempt to start the
They protect the evaporator down to -20° F (-29° C) ambient water pumps to avoid evaporator freeze. If the chiller
air temperature. Although the evaporator is equipped with does not have the ability to start the pumps, the chiller
freeze protection, it does not protect water piping external to will alarm due to lack of water flow.
the unit or the evaporator itself if there is a power failure or 3 If the chiller does not have the ability to control the
heater cable burnout, or if the chiller is unable to control the pumps and the water system is not to be drained in
chilled water pumps. Use one of the following temperatures below freezing, the chiller may be subject
recommendations for additional protection: to catastrophic evaporator failure due to freezing. The
1 If the unit will not be operated during the winter, drain freeze rating of the evaporator is based on the immersion
evaporator and chilled water piping and flush with heater and pump operation. The immersion heater itself
glycol. Drain and vent connections are provided on the may not be able to properly protect the evaporator from
evaporator to ease draining. freezing without circulation of water.
2 Add a glycol solution to the chilled water system to Low Ambient Operation
provide freeze protection. Freeze point should be
Compressor staging is adaptively determined by system load,
approximately ten degrees (F) below minimum design
ambient air temperature, and other inputs to the MicroTech III
ambient temperature.
control. A low ambient option with fan VFD allows operation
3 The addition of thermostatically controlled heat and down to -10° F (-23° C). The minimum ambient temperature is
insulation to exposed piping. based on still conditions where the wind is not greater than
The evaporator heater cable is factory wired to the 115 volt five mph. Greater wind velocities will result in reduced
circuit in the control box. This power should be supplied from discharge pressure, increasing the minimum operating ambient
a separate source, but it can be supplied from the control temperature. Field installed hail/wind guards are available to
circuit. Operation of the heaters is automatic through the allow the chiller to operate effectively down to the ambient
ambient sensing thermostat that energizes the evaporator temperature for which it was designed.
heaters for protection against freeze-up. Unless the evaporator
IM 1165 11
High Ambient Operation 2 A "paddle" type flow switch is available from Daikin
AGZ-D units for high ambient operation (105ºF to 125 F, 40.1 (part number 017503300) for field mounting and
C to 51.7 C) require the addition of the optional high ambient wiring. Certain flow rates are required to open the
package that includes a small fan with a filter in the air intake switch and are listed in Figure 3. Wire from switch
to cool the control panel. terminals Y and R to the unit control panel terminals
shown on the field wiring diagrams, page 59 and page
All units with the optional VFD low ambient fan control 60. Mount the flow switch in the leaving water line to
automatically include the high ambient option. shut down the unit when water flow is interrupted. A
flow switch is an equipment protection control and
Flow Switch should never be used to cycle a unit.
All chillers require a chilled water flow switch to check that Installation should be per manufacturer's instructions included
there is adequate water flow through the evaporator ant to shut with the switch . There is also a set of normally closed contacts
the unit down if there isn't. There are two options for meeting on the switch that can be used for an indicator light or an alarm
this requirement. to indicate when a "no flow" condition exists. Freeze protect
any flow switch that is installed outdoors. .
1 A factory-mounted thermal dispersion flow switch.
Table 3: NOTE: Differential pressure switches are not recommended for outdoor installation. They can freeze and not indicate a
no-flow condition Flow Switch Minimum/Maximum Flow Rates
inch 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4 5 6 8
Pipe Size (NOTE !)
mm 32 (2) 38 (2) 51 63 (3) 76 102 (4) 127 (4) 153 (4) 204 (5)
gpm 5.8 7.5 13.7 18.0 27.5 65.0 125.0 190.0 205.0
Flow
Min. Lpm 1.3 1.7 3.1 4.1 6.2 14.8 28.4 43.2 46.6
Adjst. No gpm 3.7 5.0 9.5 12.5 19.0 50.0 101.0 158.0 170.0
Flow Lpm 0.8 1.1 2.2 2.8 4.3 11.4 22.9 35.9 38.6
gpm 13.3 19.2 29.0 34.5 53.0 128.0 245.0 375.0 415.0
Flow
Max. Lpm 3.0 4.4 6.6 7.8 12.0 29.1 55.6 85.2 94.3
Adjst. No gpm 12.5 18.0 27.0 32.0 50.0 122.0 235.0 360.0 400.0
Flow Lpm 2.8 4.1 6.1 7.3 11.4 27.7 53.4 81.8 90.8
1 A segmented 3-inch paddle (1, 2, and 3 inches) is furnished mounted, plus a 6-inch paddle loose.
2 Flow rates for a 2-inch paddle trimmed to fit the pipe.
3 Flow rates for a 3-inch paddle trimmed to fit the pipe.
4 Flow rates for a 3-inch paddle.
5 Flow rates for a 6-inch paddle
Victaulic Coupling/Flow Switch Warning solution flow rate, and pressure drop with glycol may be
On units with shell-and-tube vessels and with factory-mounted calculated using the following formulas and tables.
flow switches and where flange connections (Victaulic-to- kW Capacity
flange adaptors or weld-on flanges) are to be used, relocating Glycol Flow (l/s)   Flow Correction Factor
4.18  Delta  T
the flow switch is required to allow for possible future
replacement. The flange will interfere with unscrewing the 1 Capacity - Multiply the capacity based on water by the
switch. The following procedure is recommended before Capacity correction factor from Table 4 or Table 5.
installing a flange to avoid interference:
2 Flow - Multiply the water evaporator flow by the Flow
1.Remove the flow switch and plug the switch opening in the correction factor from Table 4 or Table 5 to determine
nozzle. the increased evaporator flow due to glycol. If the flow is
unknown, it can be calculated from the following
2.Install the Victaulic-to-flange adaptor or weld on flange.
equation:
3.Relocate the flow switch in the water piping outside the 3 Pressure drop - Multiply the water pressure drop from
flange, close enough to it that the wire leads will reach and the Table 33, page 57 by Pressure Drop correction factor
switch can still be unscrewed. from Table 4 or Table 5. High concentrations of
Glycol Solutions propylene glycol at low temperatures may cause
unacceptably high pressure drops.
The use of a glycol/water mixture in the evaporator to prevent
4 Power - Multiply the water system power by Power
freezing will reduce system capacity and efficiency, as well as
correction factor from Table 4 or Table 5.
increase pressure drop. The system capacity, required glycol
12 IM 1165
Test coolant with a clean, accurate glycol solution hydrometer that additional compatible inhibitors be added. Concentrations
(similar to that found in service stations) or refractto determine above 35% do not provide any additional burst protection and
the freezing point. Obtain percent glycol from the freezing should be carefully considered before using.
point table below. It is recommended that a minimum of 25%
solution by weight be used for protection against corrosion or
CAUTION
Do not use an automotive-grade antifreeze. Industrial grade glycols must be used. Automotive antifreeze contains inhibitors
which will cause plating on the copper tubes within the chiller evaporator. The type and handling of glycol used must be
consistent with local codes. .
Table 4: Ethylene Glycol Factors Table 5: Propylene Glycol Factors

Freeze Point Freeze Point
% E.G. o o
Capacity Power Flow PD % P.G. o o
Capacity Power Flow PD
F C F C
10 26 -3.3 0.998 0.998 1.036 1.097 10 26 -3.3 0.995 0.997 1.016 1.100
20 18 -7.8 0.993 0.997 1.060 1.226 20 19 -7.2 0.987 0.995 1.032 1.211
30 7 -13.9 0.987 0.995 1.092 1.369 30 9 -12.8 0.978 0.992 1.057 1.380
40 -7 -21.7 0.980 0.992 1.132 1.557 40 -5 -20.6 0.964 0.987 1.092 1.703
50 -28 -33.3 0.973 0.991 1.182 1.791 50 -27 -32.8 0.952 0.983 1.140 2.251
IM 1165 13
Remote Evaporators
Remote Evaporators
Piping and Application The primary concerns related to piping are refrigerant pressure
drop; a solid liquid feed to the expansion valves, continuous
AGZ-D units have two circuits, each with either two or three oil return and properly sized refrigerant specialties.
compressors. These circuits must be kept separated throughout
the entire refrigerant piping system. Pipe all lines (suction, AGZ-D Unit Performance is negatively affected by Suction
liquid and hot gas bypass, if used) of each evaporator circuit to Line Pressure Drop Losses. Distance between the AGZ-D unit
a circuit on the outdoor unit. Be careful not to cross-pipe any and the Remote Evaporator should be kept as short as possible
lines. to minimize the performance derate.
Table 6: Remote Evaporator Piping Limitations
Evaporator circuit #1 must be piped to the circuit #1
Maximum measured piping distance between the
condensing unit . Evaporator circuit #2 must be piped to the 90 ft.
unit and the remote evaporator
circuit #2 condensing unit.
Maximum equivalent Feet of Distance between the
150 ft.
CAUTION unit and evaporator including elbows and traps
Note: For Installations with Distances exceeding these values Daikin
Refrigerant circuits must be kept isolated from eather Technical Responce Center (TRC) must be consulted for approval
of the piping design for factory warranty to be valid.
throughout the entire system. Note that the Circuit #1 Suction
Line is located diagonally from Circuit #1 Liquid Line, and the For Installations where the evaporator is installed either above
same for Circuit #2 Liquid and Suction Lines. See Figure 19. or below the unit - the following recommendations apply:
Figure 19: Location of Connections Evaporator installed below outdoor unit:
AGZ025-130 (4-6-8) FAN UNITS • 30 ft. Maximum Vertical Distance

• Only single riser suction tubing is to be used - Double riser
ENTERING WATER installations are not permitted
TEMP SENSOR
• A suction line trap must be installed at the bottom of the
1 2 SUCTION LINE #2
riser and a second trap at 20 ft. height
SUCTION LINE #1 LIQUID LINE #2 Evaporator installed above the AGZ-D Outdoor unit:
LIQUID LINE #1 • 30 ft. Vertical Distance is the recommended maximum to
prevent loss of liquid subcooling
Installation Tips and Guidelines

Insulate the suction line to reduce excessive superheat build-
1 up. Insulate the liquid line, where located in areas above
2 ambient temperature, to prevent loss of subcooling and
consequent liquid flashing.
LEAVING WATER
TEMP SENSOR
The installer must leak test the remote piping with nitrogen at
BRAZE CONNECTIONS ON EVAP ARE STAINLESS STEEL, 150 psig maximum pressure, then properly evacuate the piping
SO FIELD MUST USE MIN 45% SILVER BRAZE ROD.
systemto 500 microns or below and provide the operating
charge of R-410A. A holding charge of nitrogen/helium is
Piping Recommendations provided for the outdoor section. The brazed-plate evaporators
IMPORTANT: Refrigerant piping design must be provided by on Models 025 to 130 have no charge and are not sealed. The
a qualified Architect or Systems HVAC Design Engineer shell-and-tube evaporators on Models 140 to 190 have a
familiar with piping design, as well as local codes and nitrogen holding charge. Holding charges must be removed
regulations. The manufacturer recommendations provided here prior to the R-410a charging procedure.
are to be used as a general guide, but do not replace system The use of double risers for vertical gas risers is not allowed.
design by a qualified professional. All field piping, wiring, and Size the vertical riser per Table 7, page 15. Follow ASHRAE
procedures must be performed in accordance with ASHRAE, procedures.
EPA, and industry standards.
Slope the refrigerant lines 1" per 10 feet of horizontal run in
Proper refrigerant piping can make the difference between a the direction of refrigerant flow to assist oil return.
reliable system and an inefficient, problematic system. See the
recommended field pipe sizes shown in Table 7, page 15 and Avoid using hot gas bypass (or provide condenser fan VFDs)
Table 9, page 16. For additional information about refrigerant for applications when operation in ambient temperature below
piping techniques and sizing, see the Daikin Refrigerant 40 degrees is expected. This is necessary to maintain adequate
Piping Design Guide, AG 31-011, which can be found on condensing pressures and liquid refrigerant at the expansion
www.DaikinApplied.com. valve when condenser capacities are at their maximum.
14 IM 1165
Remote Evaporators
Interconnecting refrigerant piping and total system refrigerant Care should be taken while designing piping system to avoid
charge are field supplied and installed. The outdoor unit and the draining of condensed refrigerant to the lower component
remote evaporator are shipped with a nitrogen holding charge when normal shutdown procedures do not occur (such as a
that must be removed and replaced with R 410a. power failure).
Pressure drops in the refrigerant lines should be maintained at Location of Liquid Line Filter Drier, Solenoid Valve and
the equivalent feet calculation shown in Table 7, page 15 and Expansion Valve
should not exceed 3°F and line lengths should be made as
These components must be installed adjacent to the Remote
short as possible. Follow ASHRAE recommendations.
evaporator. The expansion valves must be installed within 12
Exceeding these recommendations will decrease performance
inches of the Evaporator Inlet Connection and the outlet piping
and could impact reliability.
of the Expansion valve must go directly into the Evaporator
A small trap must be provided at the base of each major with no bends in between.
vertical gas riser to assist in the collection of oil. If vertical
The Liquid line Solenoid valves must be installed within 3 ft.
risers exceed more than 20 feet, install a small trap at the
of the evaporator. The Liquid line Solenoid Valve must be
midpoint and at a maximum of 20 foot intervals.
connected to the AGZ cable using a junction box to extend the
Use caution in sizing the liquid line in applications where the wiring to the length required to reach the solenoid.
evaporator is above the outdoor section. The weight of the
The Liquid line Filter Drier must be installed at the Remote
liquid refrigerant in the vertical column will decrease the
Evaporator - upstream of the Liquid Solenoid Valve and
pressure at the top of the riser (approximately 0.5 psi per foot
Expansion Valve
of vertical rise) allowing some of the refrigerant to flash to a
gas. Adequate refrigerant subcooling is needed at the outdoor How to determine performance derate:
section to prevent large volumes of refrigerant gas at the Using the model size and the equivalent feet of piping between
expansion valve. the unit and the evaporator, find the Pressure Drop in °F from
Table 7. Cross-reference the Pressure Drop in °F to Table 8 to
find the capacity, power, and EER derate factor.
Table 7: Recommended Horizontal or Downflow Suction Line Size, R-410A
Unit Model Nom inal Tubing Recommended Suction Line Sizes, OD Copper -based on Eq. ft. Length Max. Suct.
AGZ-DB Tons Conn. Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to Riser Line Size
(Remote Evap) Per Size 50 Equiv. Ft 75 Equiv. Ft 100 Equiv. Ft 125 Equiv. Ft 150 Equiv. Ft for Vertical
Circuit At Unit Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F Upflow to Compr.
AGZ025DB 13 1 5/8 1 3/8 0.7 1 3/8 1.1 1 5/8 0.6 1 5/8 0.8 1 5/8 1.0 1 5/8
AGZ030DB 16 1 5/8 1 3/8 1.1 1 3/8 1.6 1 5/8 0.9 1 5/8 1.2 1 5/8 1.4 1 5/8
AGZ035DB 17.5 1 5/8 1 3/8 1.3 1 3/8 1.9 1 5/8 1.1 1 5/8 1.4 1 5/8 1.7 1 5/8
AGZ040DB 19 1 5/8 1 3/8 1.5 1 5/8 1.0 1 5/8 1.3 1 5/8 1.6 1 5/8 1.9 1 5/8
AGZ045DB 21.5 1 5/8 1 3/8 1.8 1 5/8 1.2 1 5/8 1.6 1 5/8 2.0 1 5/8 2.4 1 5/8
AGZ050DB 24 1 5/8 1 5/8 1.0 1 5/8 1.5 1 5/8 2.0 1 5/8 2.4 1 5/8 2.9 1 5/8
AGZ055DB 26 1 5/8 1 5/8 1.1 1 5/8 1.7 2 1/8 0.6 2 1/8 0.8 2 1/8 0.9 1 5/8
AGZ060DB 28 1 5/8 1 5/8 1.3 1 5/8 1.9 2 1/8 0.7 2 1/8 0.9 2 1/8 1.0 1 5/8
AGZ065DB 29 1 5/8 1 5/8 1.4 1 5/8 2.1 2 1/8 0.7 2 1/8 0.9 2 1/8 1.1 1 5/8
AGZ070DB 32 2 1/8 2 1/8 0.4 2 1/8 0.7 2 1/8 0.9 2 1/8 1.1 2 1/8 1.3 1 5/8
AGZ075DB 36 2 5/8 2 1/8 0.5 2 1/8 0.8 2 1/8 1.1 2 1/8 1.4 2 1/8 1.6 2 1/8
AGZ080DB 40 2 5/8 2 1/8 0.7 2 1/8 1.0 2 1/8 1.3 2 1/8 1.7 2 1/8 2.0 2 1/8
AGZ090DB 45 2 5/8 2 1/8 0.8 2 1/8 1.2 2 1/8 1.6 2 1/8 2.1 2 1/8 2.5 2 1/8
AGZ100DB 50 2 5/8 2 1/8 1.0 2 1/8 1.5 2 1/8 2.0 2 1/8 2.5 2 1/8 3.0 2 1/8
AGZ110DB 53 2 5/8 2 1/8 1.1 2 1/8 1.7 2 5/8 0.8 2 5/8 1.0 2 5/8 1.2 2 1/8
AGZ125DB 58 2 5/8 2 1/8 1.3 2 1/8 1.9 2 5/8 0.9 2 5/8 1.2 2 5/8 1.4 2 1/8
AGZ130DB 65 2 5/8 2 1/8 1.6 2 5/8 0.9 2 5/8 1.1 2 5/8 1.4 2 5/8 1.7 2 5/8
AGZ140DB 68 2 5/8 2 1/8 1.7 2 5/8 0.9 2 5/8 1.2 2 5/8 1.6 2 5/8 1.9 2 5/8
AGZ160DB 76 2 5/8 2 5/8 0.8 2 5/8 1.1 2 5/8 1.5 2 5/8 1.9 3 1/8 1.0 2 5/8
AGZ180DB 86 2 5/8 2 5/8 1.0 2 5/8 1.4 2 5/8 1.9 2 5/8 2.4 3 1/8 1.2 2 5/8
AGZ190DB 90 2 5/8 2 5/8 1.0 2 5/8 1.5 2 5/8 2.1 2 5/8 2.6 3 1/8 1.3 2 5/8
Notes:
1. PD°F is Pressure Drop shown in degrees F. Multiply by 2.25 for psi. Example: 1°F pressure drop = 2.25 psi.
2. For equivalent lengths between the table values, use the column higher than the length and calculate the pressure drop based on the direct ratio
of the length compared to the column value. Example: For 90 ft equivalent length, use the column value for 100 ft times 90/100 for the pressure drop
IM 1165 15
Remote Evaporators
Table 8: Performance Derate Factors for Suction Line Pressue Drop
Suction Line Unit Unit Unit
Press. Drop Capacity Pow er EER
°F % % %
0 F 100.0 100.0 100.0
1.0°F 98.5 99.5 99
2.0°F 97.1 98.9 98.2
3.0°F 95.6 98.4 97.2
4.0°F 94.1 97.9 96.1
5.0°F 92.6 97.4 95.1
No te: Data at A HRI Standard Chiller Rating Co nditio n o f 54.0 F/ 44.0 F
Chiller Inlet and Outlet Water Temps and 95.0 F Outdo o r A ir Temperature.
Table 9: Recommended Liquid Line Size, R-410A

Unit Model Nom inal Tubing Recom m ended Liquid Line Sizes, OD Copper
AGZ-DB Tons Conn. Up to Up to Up to Up to Up to
(Rem ote Evap) Per Size 50 Equiv. Ft 75 Equiv. Ft 100 Equiv. Ft 125 Equiv. Ft 150 Equiv. Ft
Circuit At Unit Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F Size PD F
AGZ025CB 13 7/8 7/8 0.2 7/8 0.3 7/8 0.4 7/8 0.5 7/8 0.6
AGZ030CB 16 7/8 7/8 0.3 7/8 0.4 7/8 0.5 7/8 0.7 7/8 0.8
AGZ035CB 17.5 7/8 7/8 0.3 7/8 0.5 7/8 0.6 7/8 0.8 7/8 0.9
AGZ040CB 19 7/8 7/8 0.4 7/8 0.5 7/8 0.7 7/8 0.9 7/8 1.1
AGZ045CB 21.5 7/8 7/8 0.5 7/8 0.7 7/8 0.9 7/8 1.1 7/8 1.4
AGZ050CB 24 7/8 7/8 0.6 7/8 0.8 7/8 1.1 7/8 1.4 7/8 1.7
AGZ055CB 26 7/8 7/8 0.6 7/8 1.0 7/8 1.3 7/8 1.6 7/8 1.9
AGZ060CB 28 7/8 7/8 0.7 7/8 1.1 7/8 1.5 7/8 1.8 7/8 2.2
AGZ065CB 29 7/8 7/8 0.8 7/8 1.2 7/8 1.6 7/8 2.0 7/8 2.3
AGZ070CB 32 7/8 7/8 0.9 7/8 1.4 7/8 1.9 7/8 2.3 7/8 2.8
AGZ075CB 36 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.3 1 1/8 0.5 1 1/8 0.6 1 1/8 0.8 1 1/8 1.0
AGZ080CB 40 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.4 1 1/8 0.6 1 1/8 0.8 1 1/8 1.0 1 1/8 1.2
AGZ090CB 45 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.5 1 1/8 0.7 1 1/8 1.0 1 1/8 1.2 1 1/8 1.5
AGZ100CB 50 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.6 1 1/8 0.9 1 1/8 1.2 1 1/8 1.5 1 1/8 1.8
AGZ110CB 53 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.7 1 1/8 1.0 1 1/8 1.3 1 1/8 1.6 1 1/8 2.0
AGZ125CB 58 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.8 1 1/8 1.1 1 1/8 1.5 1 1/8 1.9 1 1/8 2.3
AGZ130CB 65 1 1/8 1 1/8 0.9 1 1/8 1.4 1 1/8 1.9 1 1/8 2.3 1 1/8 2.8
AGZ140CB 68 1 3/8 1 3/8 0.4 1 3/8 0.6 1 3/8 0.8 1 3/8 0.9 1 3/8 1.1
AGZ160CB 76 1 3/8 1 3/8 0.5 1 3/8 0.7 1 3/8 0.9 1 3/8 1.1 1 3/8 1.4
AGZ180CB 86 1 3/8 1 3/8 0.6 1 3/8 0.9 1 3/8 1.1 1 3/8 1.4 1 3/8 1.7
AGZ190CB 90 1 3/8 1 3/8 0.6 1 3/8 0.9 1 3/8 1.2 1 3/8 1.6 1 3/8 1.9
Notes:
1. P D°F is P ressure Dro p sho wn in degrees F. M ultiply by 4.75 fo r psi. Example: 1F degree pressure dro p = 4.75 psi.
2. Fo r equivalent lengths between the table values, use the co lumn higher than the length and calculate the pressure dro p based o n the direct ratio
o f the length co mpared to the co lumn value. Example: Fo r 90 ft equivalent length, use the co lumn value fo r 100 ft times 90/100 fo r the pressure dro p
Wiring for AGZ-Remote Evaporators Sensor Wiring

Refrigerant Specialties Kit The Remote Evaporator AGZ-D Units come with long sensor
wires for the remote evap installation. These wires allow the
Remote Evaporator units include a Refrigerant Specialties Kit
evaporator to be installed up to 90 ft. from the AGZ-D unit
which supplies the following field-installed components:
without splicing these wires. The sensor wires to the
• Expansion Valve evaporator include the following :
• Models 025-130 use Thermal Expansion Valves (TXV) • Evaporator Water Inlet and Outlet Temperature Sensor
• Models 140-190 use Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) • Suction Line Temperature Sensors for Piping at the
• Liquid Line Solenoid Valves Evaporator for both Circuit #1 and #2
• Liquid Line Filter Drier with Filter Drier Core • Suction Transducer Wiring for Installation on Evaporator
• Liquid Line Sight Glasses Suctioin Piping for both Circuit #1 and #2
16 IM 1165
Remote Evaporators
For AGZ140-190D units with Electric Expansion Valves, the located inside the AGZ-D control box. The wiring connections
wiring to the evaporator must be spliced using #14 wire ga. need to located indoors out of the weather and securely spliced
The factory supplied cable with #18 ga wire is suitable for 30 and taped.
ft. maximum length. For installations where the evaporator Figure 20: EXV Field Wiring
will be located more than 30 ft from the outdoor unit, the (848) (848) (848) (848)
sensors must be relocated to the Suction Line piping at the

Evaporator for proper unit operation. If the evaporator is A+ B- GND 24V
E.E.X.V.1
located within 30 linear feet of piping from the outdoor unit, D01A
X1
M16
NC
(438)
(439)
(440)
900 T3-M NO
the two suction temperature sensors can be left on the outdoor (659) /
C1
X2
T1 T3
unit factory suction line as shipped. 902 A2
M16
A1 903
+5V
+24V
D01B
(756) / X3
There are two evaporator water temperature sensors with 90 DI1 T3-M TB5 G
EXV-1
T2
BRN RED
feet of cable coiled in the unit behind the control panel for R1
M1+
1
W1 W1
extension to the evaporator and insertion in fitting located on POL94E.00/MCQ M1-
WHT GRN
2

T4
the inlet and outlet nozzle on AGZ-D models 140 to 190. For ADDRESS=3
M2+
BLU WHT
3
ON W2 W2
models AGZ 030 to 130 with brazed-plate evaporators, the M2-
BLK BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 4
sensors are inserted into back of heat exchanger, opposite the A+ B- GND 24V
water connections, at the designated inlet and outlet water

temperature sensor locations. (847) (847) (847) (847)
(863) (863) (863) (863)
There is one suction line refrigerant temperature sensor per

circuit installed on suction line with 90 feet of cable coiled
behind the unit control panel, intended for extension to the A+ B- GND 24V
E.E.X.V.2
X1
evaporator. Place the sensor in a brazed well (provided in kit, 901
D01A
T3-M
M26
NC
(538)
(539)
(540)
NO
C1
installed in the field) on the suction line in a straight-flat area, (659) / X2
T1 T3
+5V
close to the suction line pressure transducer. Install with heat 906 A2
M26
A1 907 +24V
D01B
conductive compound and insulate well. If installed on a (756) / X3
EXV-2
DI1 T3-M TB5 G
horizontal pipe run, locate between the 2-4 o'clock positions, R1
T2
M1+
BRN RED
1
or, on a TXV, locate the bulb and equalizer line on suction line POL94E.00/MCQ M1-
WHT GRN
W1

W1
2
at the 3 or 9 o’clock position. ADDRESS=5
T4
BLU WHT
ON M2+
3
W2 W2
BLK BLK
There is one suction line pressure transducer per circuit with 1 2 3 4 5 6 M2-
4

A+ B- GND 24V
90 feet of cable coiled, installed on the suction line behind the
unit control panel for extension to the evaporator. Mount the
transducer in the suction line, 1-2 feet from the evaporator
Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Wiring
head, on the top or side of the pipe. Connection is ¼-inch flare
with a flare Schrader. NOTE: If the evaporator is located The Liquid Line Solenoid valves are supplied as part of the
within 30 linear feet of piping from the outdoor unit, the two Specialties Kit. These valves must be located within 3 feet of
suction pressure transducers can be left on the outdoor unit the evaporator. Included with the Liquid Line Solenoids are
factory suction line as shipped. wiring cables which are 10 ft. long. These cables must be
connected to the terminal block inside the AGZ-D control box
One solenoid valve per circuit must be wired to the unit
via a field-supplied junction box and #14 ga. wiring. This
control panel. They come equipped with an 8-foot cable that
24volt wiring should be run in conduit, or at a minimum, two-
must be added to. See the wiring diagram on page 65 for
wire cable with a protective covering must be used. See Field
connection points at unit.
Wiring Diagram included in unit, or Typical Field Wiring
Expansion Valve Wiring Diagram on page 59 and page 60 for wiring schematic.
AGZ-D models 025-130 use Thermal Expansion Valves Pumpdown
(TXV). These valves must be located within 12 inches of the
The pumpdown capacity of AGZ units is given in the Physical
evaporator liquied line connections and the expansion valve
Data Tables starting on page 39. Care should be exercised to
bulbs. The 1/4” equalizer lines must be attached to the suction
include all equipment and lines when calculating the system
tubes near the evaporator outlet.
charge relative to the unit's pumpdown (storage) capacity. The
AGZ-D models 140-190 use Electronic Expansion Valves AGZ-D remote evaporators have an insignificant operating
(EXV). The EXV has a 1 ft. cable attached with an M12 charge. It is mandatory that the liquid line solenoid valve be
Threaded Connector. A 15 ft. cable is supplied with the kit to located close to the evaporator so that pump down does not
attach to the 1 ft cable at the valve. have to remove and store a large quantity of liquid refrigerant
from the liquid line.
The field must supply #14 ga. wires to extend this cable to run
back and connect to the Expansion Valve control module
IM 1165 17
18
AGZ025-130 (4-6-8) FAN UNITS
ENTERING WATER
(4 FAN UNIT SHOWN)
TEMP SENSOR
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
SUCTION #2
SUCTION #1 CIRCUIT #1
COMPRESSORS
Remote Evaporators
LIQUID CIRCUIT #2
LIQUID CIRCUIT #1
Figure 21: Remote Evaporator Piping Models 025-130
ROUTE COPPER TUBE PIPING

APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN
LIQUID #1
LIQUID #2 LEAVING WATER BALL VALVE

TEMP SENSOR (INCLUDED IN KIT)
BRAZE CONNECTIONS ON EVAP ARE STAINLESS STEEL,

SO FIELD MUST USE MIN 45% SILVER BRAZE ROD. SCHRADER FITTINGS
(FIELD SUPPLIED)
SUCTION #2 FILTER DRIER SHELL

FILTER DRIER CORES SOLENOID VALVE CABLES
SUCTION #1 FELT GASKET KIT (INCLUDED IN KIT)
FILTER DRIER CLAMP RUN SOLENOID VALVE CABLE IN BACK
CHARGING VALVE (ALL INCLUDED IN KIT) OF CNTL BOX AND CONNECT TO:
(INCLUDED IN KIT)
NOTES: CIR#1
SOLENOID VALVE BLK#1 TO TB2 91
1. FOR FILTER DRIER SERVICE: (INCLUDED IN KIT)
PUMP DOWN SYSTEM USING LIQUID LIQUID #1 BLK#2 TO TB2 93
LINE BALL VALVE LOCATED NEXT TO DRIER. SIGHT GLASS GND TO CONNECT WITH GND WIRE
2. LIQUID LINE SOLENOID & FILTER DRIER MUST (INCLUDED IN KIT) CIR#2
BE LOCATED AT REMOTE EVAP. WATER IN BLK#1 TO TB2 92
3. SUPPORT FIELD PIPING AS REQUIRED. WATER STRAINER REQUIRED SCHRADER FITTINGS BLK#2 TO TB2 93
(FIELD SUPPLIED) (FIELD SUPPLIED) GND TO CONNECT WITH GND WIRE
EXPANSION VALVE
WATER OUT (INCLUDED IN KIT)
HOTGAS BYPASS LINE MUST ENTER FROM VERTICAL POSITION AS SHOWN R331738201
LIQUID #2
IM 1165
IM 1165
CIRCUIT #2 COMRESSORS
AGZ140-190 10-12 FAN UNITS
HOTGAS
BYPASS #2
LIQUID #2
HOTGAS
BYPASS #1
LIQUID #1
Figure 22: Remote Evaporator Piping Models 140-190
BALL VALVE
(INCLUDED IN KIT)
CIRCUIT #1 COMRESSORS
SCHRADER VALVE (FIELD SUPPLIED) NOTES:
SUCTION #2 1. FOR FILTER DRIER SERVICE:
SIGHT GLASS & SADDLE PUMP DOWN SYSTEM USING LIQUID
SCHRADER VALVE (INCLUDED IN KIT) SUCTION #1 LINE BALL VALVE LOCATED NEXT TO DRIER.
(FIELD SUPPLIED) 2. LIQUID LINE SOLENOID & FILTER DRIER MUST
SOLENOID VALVE BE LOCATED AT REMOTE EVAP.
(INCLUDED IN KIT) TEMP SENSOR TUBE
(FIELD SUPPLIED) 3. SUPPORT FIELD PIPING AS REQUIRED
LOCATE IN POSITION SHOWN
HOTGAS BYPASS LINE MUST ENTER

FROM VERTICAL POSITION AS SHOWN SOLENOID VALVE CABLES
FILTER DRIER SHELL EXPANSION VALVE (INCLUDED IN KIT)
FILTER DRIER CORES (INCLUDED IN KIT)
FELT GASKET KIT RUN SOLENOID VALVE CABLE IN BACK
FILTER DRIER CLAMPS OF CNTL BOX AND CONNECT TO:
(ALL INCLUDED IN KIT) SCHRADER VALVES CIR#1
(FIELD SUPPLIED) BLK#1 TO TB2 91
BLK#2 TO TB2 93
GND TO CONNECT WITH GND WIRE
BRAZE CONNECTIONS ON EVAP ARE STAINLESS CIR#2
WATER OUT STEEL, SO FIELD MUST USE MIN. 45% SIVLER BRAZE ROD. BLK#1 TO TB2 92
BLK#2 TO TB2 93
LEAVING WATER WATER IN GND TO CONNECT WITH GND WIRE
TEMP SENSOR WATER STRAINER REQUIRED
(FIELD SUPPLIED)
ENTERING WATER
TEMP SENSOR
19
Remote Evaporators
Remote Evaporators
Evaporator Dimensions
Figure 23: AGZ025D-055D Brazed Plate Evaporator Dimensions
T1
200 10 x 21mm
7.87 MOUNTING SLOTS
(Typical) B2
W1
18
B1
.69
T2
C1
W2
C2
155 30
6.10 1.18
48
1.87 T1
B2 B1
W1
110 48
8 4.33
.31 1.89
L
BE
LA
490 369 400

538 19.29 14.53 15.76
21.18 357
166 14.06
6.54
83 7 48
3.27 .28 1.89
W2
C1 C2
42 T2
1.66
M8 X 23 (n*12 BOLTS)
18
.71
90 3
109 3.54 38 .13
A
4.27 1.50
48 250 NOTES:
1.89 9.84 1. EVAPORATOR MUST HAVE LABEL WITH UL APPROVAL 331750000
2. 2 STUDS AT TOP OF EVAP ARE REQUIRED FOR LIFTING. HEAT EXCHANGER, ACH230, AGZ
Figure 24: AGZ060D-130D Brazed Plate Evaporator Dimensions

T1
B2
W1
B1
322
12.68 T2
205
8.07 C1
21 108 W2
.84 4.25 C2
T1
59
2.30
B2 B1
W1 52 52
2.05 2.05
739
29.09
L
BE
LA
632
791 568 24.88
31.13 22.36
[76.3]
130
3.00
5.12
TYP. 356
224 14.00
8.82 10 52
.39 2.05
W2
C1 C2 T2
40
1.57
100 [5]
3.95 .20
M10x25 (n 12 BOLTS)
105 22
137 132 .87 TYP.
4.13 21
5.40 5.20
TYP. .83
45 45 49
52 A
1.77 1.77 1.93 TYP.
2.04
290
11.42
DIMENSION A = (12 + 2.60 * nP) / 25.4
342
13 46
20 IM 1165
Remote Evaporators
Table 10: AGZ025D-130D Brazed Plate Evaporator Dimension References from Drawings
2X Suction 2x Liquid 2x Water 2x Water

Connection Connection Connection Connection
DIM A
MODEL (IDF) (IDF) (Victaulic) (NPT)
B1 & B2 C1 & C2 T1 & T2 W1 & W2

(in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.)
AGZ025D 1.625 0.875 2.5 0.75 7.27
AGZ030D 1.625 0.875 2.5 0.75 7.27
AGZ035D 1.625 0.875 2.5 0.75 7.96
AGZ040D 1.625 0.875 2.5 0.75 8.65
AGZ045D 1.625 1.125 2.5 0.75 10.04
AGZ050D 1.625 1.125 2.5 0.75 11.43
AGZ055D 1.625 1.125 2.5 0.75 12.12
AGZ060D 2.125 1.375 3.0 0.75 7.66
AGZ065D 2.125 1.375 3.0 0.75 8.90
AGZ070D 2.125 1.375 3.0 0.75 8.90
AGZ075D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 10.13
AGZ080D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 11.36
AGZ090D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 12.19
AGZ100D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 14.24
AGZ110D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 15.06
AGZ125D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 17.15
AGZ130D 2.625 1.375 3.0 0.75 19.17
Figure 25: AGZ140D-190D Shell and Tube Evaporator Dimension Drawing
DATAPLATES HEATER
WIRES
NOTES:
1. NO. OF REFRIGERANT CIRCUITS = 2
NO. OF REFRIGERANT PASSES = 2
SEE TABLE FOR EVAP RATINGS @ 54/44°F
18.30 REF WATER TEMP WITH R-410A REFRIGERANT.
465
2. NOMINAL WATER FLOW = 2.4 GPM/TON AT 54/44°F WATER TEMP.
3. INSTALL 110V 170 WATTS HEATER CABLE ASSY.
SUBMERSION TYPE WITH THERMOSTAT PROTECTION TO -20°F.
3.94 4. ASSY. INSULATED WITH 3/4" EUROBATEX (FLEXIBLE, CLOSED CELL, ELASTOMERIC
100
INSULATION MATERIAL, UK CLASS O, SELF EXTINGUISHING, OZONE RESISTANT,
MANUFACTURED BY UNION FOAM S.p.A., BELLUSCO [MI], ITALY) OR UL APPROVED
INSULATION WITH 5VA FLAMMABILITY RATING.
5. TUBE SIDE MAX. ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE = 450 PSIG MAX.
6. EVAP. TO BE ASME APPROVED FOR REFRIGERANT SIDE PRESSURE OF 450PSIG.
6.81 77.19 11.65
173 1961 296 7. WATER SIDE MAX. ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE = 152 PSIG
8. CAP ALL OPENING FOR SHIPMENT.
95.65 REF
2430 9. SENSOR WELL REF. PROVIDES P/N: E44070058 TO BE PROVIDED (INSTALLED)
1/4" NPFT
1/4" NPFT 59.06 QTY 2 12.52
QTY 1 1500 318 3.94 3.94
VENT 100 100
Ø3.13 IDS SCHRADER
SUCTION FERRULE FITTINGS
PART # E44070017 QTY 2
90° FLG. # E44060010
1.69
43
45°
OUTLET
INLET
SENSOR WELL
QTY 2
SEE NOTE 9 11.00 3.35
279 .75 .75 85
19 19
8.62 OD
5MM THICKNESS DRAIN 1/2" NPFT
VICTAULIC GROOVED 1/2" NPFT QTY 2
34.46 3000# HALF CLPG 11.95 Ø1.38 ODS 3.00 3.00 1.50
QTY 2 LIQUID FERRULE
875 QTY 2 304 76 76 38
PART # E44070021
FLG. # E44060006
71.27 2.07
1810 53
16.00
2.01 406
51
.224
6
QTY 4
BOTH SIDES
1.27
32
11.98 9.44 16.00
304 240 .625 x 1.25 406
OBROUND
QTY 2
.813 2.50
21 64
QTY 4 5.00
127
Note: Service Clearance: Allow 3 feet of service clearance on all four sides for all evaporators.
IM 1165 21
22
Dimensions - Packaged
ISOLATOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF UNIT BASE

M3 M1
337 1721 337
13.3 67.8 13.3 52
L3 L1 2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
Figure 26: AGZ025DH - 035DH (Packaged)
19 L4 L2 206
.75 M4 M2 52 CONTROL BOX WIDTH
8.1 REF.
QTY. 4 2.0
CONTROL
BOX
BLANK PANELS ARE

USED ON UNIT SIDES.
SLOPED 50" COILS
USED ON INSIDE.
498 2409
80 19.6 94.9
3.2 64
POWER ENTRY POINTS 51
2X 2.5 165 366
ARE ON THE OPPOSITE 2.0 FIELD CONTROL 2546
127 6.5 14.4
SIDE OF CONTROL BOX CONNECTIONS 100.2
.875" KNOCKOUTS 5.0
.875" KNOCKOUTS
CG CG
POWER ENTRY POINTS
152 .875" KNOCKOUTS
EVAP. FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
WATER 6.0 1094
43.1 EVAP.
INLET
D
Y 153
6.0
A
B
L3 L1
506 L4 EVAP. L2 506
19.9 WATER 19.9 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 4 FANS
OUTLET
C X 331749221
Z AGZ025D
2396 AGZ030D
94.3 2235
88.0 AGZ035D
DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
LIFTING BRACKETS
IM 1165
IM 1165
M3 M1
337 1721 337
13.3 67.8 13.3 52
L3 L1 2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
19 L4 L2 206
52 CONTROL BOX WIDTH
.75 M4 M2 8.1 REF
QTY. 4 2.0
CONTROL
BOX
POWER ENTRY POINTS

ARE ON THE OPPOSITE
SIDE OF CONTROL BOX
.875" KNOCKOUTS 498
80
19.6
3.1 64 2546
51 2X 2.5 165 367 100.2
2.0 127 6.5 14.4
FIELD CONTROL
5.0 CONNECTIONS
.875 KNOCKOUTS POWER ENTRY POINTS
CG .875" KNOCKOUTS
CG FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
152
EVAP. 6.0
WATER EVAP.
INLET
1094 D
Y
43.1 153 2409
6.0 94.9
A
B
L3 L1
506 L4 EVAP. L2 506 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 4 FANS
WATER X
19.9 19.9 2235 3317492 2 2
OUTLET 88.0 AGZ040D AGZ060D
C
DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE AGZ045D AGZ065D
Z LIFTING BRACKETS AGZ050D AGZ070D
2396
94.3 AGZ055D
23
24
M3 M1
315 2796 315 52
12.4 110.1 12.4 2.0
L3 L1
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
1258
49.5 COMPRESSORS
19
.75 CIRCUIT #1
QTY. 4
L4 L2
M4 M2 52
2.0 206
CONTROL BOX WIDTH
8.1 REF
CONTROL
BOX
EVAP. WATER
INLET 80
51 3.1 497 64 165 367
2.0 127 19.6 2X 2.5 6.5 14.5
5.0
FIELD CONTROL 2545
152 CONNECTIONS POWER ENTRY POINTS
6.0 .875 KNOCKOUTS 100.2
.875 KNOCKOUTS CG FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE
CG

Y OPPOSITE SIDE OF 95.0
A EVAP CONTROL BOX.
858 .875 KNOCKOUTS 1094 1094
33.8 153 1034
6.0 40.7 43.1 43.1
290
11.4
L3 L1 610
610 L4 L2 24.0 CERTIFIED DWG. AGZ-D 6 FANS
X
24.0 Z 331749222
EVAP. WATER 2235 AGZ075D
OUTLET 88.0 AGZ080D
DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE AGZ090D
3426 AGZ100D
LIFTING BRACKETS
134.9
IM 1165
IM 1165
M1
M5 M3
640 1722 1719 315
25.2 67.8 67.7 12.4
L3 L1
52
2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
1118 COMPRESSORS
44.0 CIRCUIT #1
19
.75 52
QTY. 6 2.0
L4 L2
M6 M4 M2
CONTROL
BOX
Figure 29: AGZ110DH - 130DH 208/230 volt models (380-575 next page)
298 64
88 11.7 2X 2.5
127
EVAP. 3.5 POWER ENTRY POINTS
51 5.0
WATER FIELD CONTROL .875" KNOCKOUTS
INLET 2.0 152 CONNECTIONS FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE 2539
6.0 .875" KNOCKOUTS CG
CG 99.9

Y ARE ON THE OPPOSITE 95.0
A SIDE OF CONTROL BOX.
857 1117 EVAP 1117
153 .875" KNOCKOUTS
33.7 44.0 44.0
6.0
289
11.4
L3 L1 165 167
L4 EVAP. L2 610 6.5 6.6
610 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 8 FANS
WATER 24.0
24.0 OUTLET 331749223 X
AGZ110D - 208/230V
AGZ125D - 208/230V 2235
Z
AGZ130D - 208/230V 88.0
4396 DIMENSION DOES NOT
173.1 INCLUDE LIFTING BRACKETS
25
26
M1
M5 M3
640 1722 1719 315
25.2 67.8 67.7 12.4
L3 L1
52
2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
1118 COMPRESSORS
44.0 19 CIRCUIT #1
.75
QTY. 6
52
2.0
L4 L2
M6 M4 M2
206
CONTROL BOX WIDTH
8.1 REF
CONTROL
BOX
497 64
51
Figure 30: AGZ110DH - 130DH 380-575 volt models (208/230 previous page)
127 19.6 2X 2.5

2.0 80 POWER ENTRY POINTS
EVAP. 5.0 FIELD CONTROL .875" KNOCKOUTS
3.1 CONNECTIONS
WATER 152 FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE 2539
INLET .875" KNOCKOUTS
CG 6.0 CG 99.9

ARE ON THE OPPOSITE 95.0
Y A SIDE OF CONTROL BOX.
153 1035 .875" KNOCKOUTS 1095 EVAP 1095
857 6.0 40.7 43.1 43.1
33.7
289
11.4
L3 L1 165 366
L4 EVAP. L2 6.5 14.4 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 8 FANS
610 WATER 610
24.0 OUTLET 24.0 331749223
X
4396 AGZ110D - 380-575V
Z 2235 AGZ125D - 380-575V
173.1
88.0 AGZ130D - 380-575V
DIMENSION DOES NOT
INCLUDE LIFTING BRACKETS
IM 1165
IM 1165
M5 M3 M1
1069 2450 1719 315
42.1 96.5 67.7 12.4
L3 L1
19 52
.75 2.0
QTY. 6
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
814
32.1 52
2.0
L4 L2
M6 M4 M2
930 1961
36.6 77.2 CONTROL
BOX
50" COILS
299 64
87 11.8 2.5
3.4 2538
51 127 64 POWER ENTRY POINTS 99.9
2.0 5.0 FIELD CONTROL 2.5 .875" KNOCKOUTS
152 CONNECTIONS FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE
6.0 .875" KNOCKOUTS CG
CG
203 2413
8.00 POWER ENTRY POINTS 95.0
VICTAULIC ARE ON THE OPPOSITE
CONNECTION SIDE OF CONTROL BOX. 1119 1119
Y 1057 .875" KNOCKOUTS
EVAPORATOR 41.6 44.1 44.1
432
17.0
EVAP. L3 L1
WATER L4 EVAP. L2 610 165 167
OUTLET WATER 6.5 6.6
INLET 24.0
1392 X
54.8 Z *3317492040A1*
2235 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 10 FANS
5553 88.0 AGZ140D - AGZ180D
218.6 DIMENSION DOES NOT
27
28
M7 M5 M3 M1
378 2286 1826 1719 315
14.9 90.0 71.9 67.7 12.4
L5 L3 L1
19 52
Figure 32: AGZ190DH (Packaged)
.75 2.0
QTY. 8
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
814
32.1 52
2.0
M8 L6 M6 L4 M4 L2 M2
1900 1961
74.8 77.2
CONTROL
BOX
50"
COILS
300 64
87 11.8 2.5
3.4 127
51 5.0 FIELD CONTROL 64 POWER ENTRY POINTS
2.0 152 CONNECTIONS 2.5 .875" KNOCKOUTS
Y 6.0 .875" KNOCKOUTS FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE 2538
CG 99.9
CG
2413
POWER ENTRY POINTS 95.0
ARE ON THE OPPOSITE
SIDE OF CONTROL BOX. 1119 1119
EVAPORATOR 1209 .875" KNOCKOUTS 44.1 44.1
432 47.6
17.0
L5 EVAP EVAP L3 L1
L6 203 L4 L2 165 167
8.00 WATER WATER 6.5 6.6
VICTAULIC OUTLET INLET
CONNECTION X
*3317492050A1*
948 2801 2165 610 2235
37.3 110.3 85.2 24.0 88.0 CERTIFIED DWG, AGZ-D 12 FANS
Z DIMENSION DOES NOT AGZ190D
6524
256.9
IM 1165
IM 1165
Dimensions - Remote Evaporator Models
ISOLATOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS ARE ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF UNIT
19 M3 M1
.75 337 1721 337
QTY. 4 13.3 L3 67.8 L1 13.3
52
2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
HOTGAS
1476 BYPASS
449
58.1 CIR. 1
17.7
LIQUID
LIQ.
CIR. 2
1247 HOTGAS
49.1 BYPASS
Note: Evaporator Dimensions begin on page 19.
LIQUID CIR. 2 SUCTION

CIR. 1 CIR. 1 SEE
SUCTION CHART "A"
CIR. 2
52
Figure 33: AGZ025DH - 035DH (Remote Evaporator)
2.0
L4 L2
M4 M2
1444 77 206
CONTROL BOX WIDTH
56.9 3.0 8.1 REF.
1521 156
59.9 6.1 CONTROL
BOX
BLANK PANELS ARE

USED ON UNIT SIDES.
SLOPED 50" COILS USED
ON INSIDE OF UNIT.
498 64
19.6 2x 2.5
80 POWER ENTRY POINTS
3.1 FIELD CONTROL FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
51 127 CONNECTIONS 22
2.0 5.0 152
22 .875 KNOCKOUTS 2546
6.0
CG .875 KNOCKOUTS CG 100.2
POWER ENTRY POINTS 1094 2409

ARE ON OPPOSITE SIDE 43.1 94.9
OF CONTROL BOX
Y 22 1094
.875 KNOCKOUTS 43.1
1034 649
40.7 25.5
365
SUCT.
14.4
HGBP
L3 L1 506 165 366
506 L4 L2
19.9 6.5 14.4 CERT. AGZ-D 4 FAN REMOTE
19.9 Z 165 2235 X
2396 6.5 88.0 331749261
94.3 LIQUID DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE AGZ025D
LIFTING BRACKETS AGZ030D
AGZ035D
29
30
ISOLATOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS ARE ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF UNIT
19 M3 M1
337 1721 337
.75
13.3 67.8 13.3
QTY. 4 L3 L1
52
2.0
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #1
HOTGAS
BYPASS
1476 449 CIR. 1
58.1 17.7
LIQUID LIQ.
CIR. 2
1247 HOTGAS
49.1 BYPASS
LIQUID CIR. 2 SUCTION
CIR. 1 CIR. 1 SEE
SUCTION
CIR. 2 CHART "A"
52
2.0
L4 L2
M4 M2
1444 77
56.9 3.0 206
1521 156 CONTROL BOX WIDTH
8.1 REF.
59.9 6.1 CONTROL
BOX
165 366
498 64 6.5 14.4
80 127 19.6 2X 2.5
51 3.1 5.0 FIELD CONTROL POWER ENTRY POINTS
2.0 CONNECTIONS FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
152 22 22 2546
6.0 .875 KNOCKOUTS CG .875 KNOCKOUTS
CG 100.2
POWER ENTRY POINTS

ARE ON OPPOSITE SIDE
1094 2409
OF CONTROL BOX
43.1 94.9
22
Y .875 KNOCKOUTS 1094
649 43.1
1034
40.7 25.5
SUCT. 365
14.4
HGBP
L3 L1 506
L4 L2 CERT. AGZ-D 4 FAN REMOTE
506 19.9 165 X 331749261
19.9 2235
Z 6.5 88.0 AGZ040D AGZ060D
2396 LIQUID AGZ045D AGZ065D
94.3 DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
LIFTING BRACKETS AGZ050D AGZ070D
IM 1165
IM 1165
M3 M1
315 2796 315 52
12.4 110.1 12.4 2.0
L3 L1
COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
1258
49.5 COMPRESSORS
19
.75 CIRCUIT #1
QTY. 4
L4 L2
M4 M2 52
2.0 206
CONTROL BOX WIDTH
8.1 REF
CONTROL
BOX
EVAP. WATER
INLET 80
51 3.1 497 64 165 367
2.0 127 19.6 2X 2.5 6.5 14.5
5.0
FIELD CONTROL 2545
152 CONNECTIONS POWER ENTRY POINTS
6.0 .875 KNOCKOUTS 100.2
.875 KNOCKOUTS CG FRONT AND RIGHT SIDE
CG

Y OPPOSITE SIDE OF 95.0
A EVAP CONTROL BOX.
858 .875 KNOCKOUTS 1094 1094
33.8 153 1034
6.0 40.7 43.1 43.1
290
11.4
L3 L1 610
610 L4 L2 24.0 CERTIFIED DWG. AGZ-D 6 FANS
X
24.0 Z 331749222
EVAP. WATER 2235 AGZ075D
OUTLET 88.0 AGZ080D
DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE AGZ090D
3426 AGZ100D
LIFTING BRACKETS
134.9
31
32
M5 M3 M1
640 1722 1719 315
52 25.2 67.8 67.7 12.4
2.0
L3 L1
19 74
.75 2.9 COMPRESSORS
CIRCUIT #2
QTY. 6
206 CIR. 2
8.1
CIR. 1 COMPRESSORS
1015 CIRCUIT #1
39.9
52
2.0
L4 L2
M6 M4 M2
CONTROL
BOX
51
2.0
EXHAUST FANS
ARE OPTIONAL
298 64 279
87 11.7 2x 2.5 11.0
3.4
51 127 FIELD CONTROL

CONNECTIONS
2.0 5.0 152 .875 KNOCKOUTS POWER ENTRY POINTS
6.0 FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE 2539
CG CG .875 KNOCKOUTS 99.9
2414
SUCTION POWER ENTRY POINTS 95.0
ARE ON OPPOSITE SIDE 1117 1117
Y HOTGAS 1059
881 BYPASS OF CONTROL BOX 44.0 44.0
41.7
34.7 22
356 .875 KNOCKOUTS
14.0
Figure 36: AGZ110DH - 130DH 208/230 volt models (Remote Evaporator) (380-575 next page)
610 165 167

610
24.0 6.5 6.6
24.0 CERT. AGZ-D 8 FAN REMOTE
215 2156
Z 331749263
8.4 84.9 X AGZ110D - 208/230V
LIQUID AGZ125D - 208/230V
2235 AGZ130D - 208/230V
4396 88.0
173.1 DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
LIFTING BRACKETS
NOTE: CENTER POST IS NOT SHOWN ON THIS SIDE OF UNIT IN ORDER TO SHOW PIPING.
IM 1165
IM 1165
M5 M3 M1
640 1722 1719 315
52 25.2 67.8 67.7 12.4
2.0
L3 L1
19 74
.75 2.9 COMPRESSORS
QTY. 6 CIRCUIT #2
206 CIR. 2
8.1
CIR. 1
1015 COMPRESSORS
39.9 CIRCUIT #1
L4 L2
52 206
M6 M4 M2 CONTROL BOX WIDTH
2.0 8.1 REF.
CONTROL
BOX
497
80 19.6 64
3.1 FIELD CONTROL 2X 2.5
51 127 CONNECTIONS POWER ENTRY POINTS
2.0 5.0 .875 KNOCKOUTS FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
152 .875 KNOCKOUTS 2539
6.0 CG
CG 99.9
2414
95.0
SUCTION
POWER ENTRY POINTS 1095 1095
Y HOTGAS ARE ON THE OPPOSITE
881 BYPASS 1035 43.1 43.1
34.7 SIDE OF CONTROL BOX.
40.7 .875 KNOCKOUTS
356
14.0
L3 L1
610 L4 L2 610
Figure 37: AGZ110DH - 130DH 380-575 volt models (Remote Evaporator) (208/230 previous page)
165 366
24.0 24.0 CERT. AGZ-D 8 FAN REMOTE
215 2156 6.5 14.4
Z 331749263
8.4 84.9
LIQUID X AGZ110D
AGZ125D
4396 2235 AGZ130D
173.1 88.0
NOTE: CENTER POST IS NOT SHOWN ON THIS SIDE OF UNIT IN ORDER TO SHOW PIPING. DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
LIFTING BRACKETS
33
34
1069 2450 1719

42.1 96.5 67.7
19
490 .75 52
19.3 M5 L3 QTY. 6 M3 L1 M1 2.0
363 COMPRESSORS
14.3 CIRCUIT #2
LIQ.
CIR. 2
1339
52.7
HGBP COMPRESSORS
CIR. 2 CIRCUIT #1
M6 L4 M4 L2 M2
897 52
363 35.3 2.0
14.3 1227 HGBP

LIQ. 48.3 CIR. 1
CIR. 1 SUCTION
CIR. 2 1011
39.8
SUCTION
CIR. 1
3284 51
129.3 2.0
TYP. CONTROL
EXHAUST FANS BOX
ARE OPTIONAL
282
11.1
299 64
11.8 2.5
87 POWER ENTRY POINTS
3.4 FIELD CONTROL 64 FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE 2538
51 127 22 99.9
152 CONNECTIONS 2.5
2.0 5.0 .875 KNOCKOUTS
6.0 22
CG CG 2413
.875 KNOCKOUTS
95.0
POWER ENTRY POINTS

Y ARE ON OPPOSITE SIDE 1116 1116
OF CONTROL BOX 43.9 43.9
1057
22
41.6
.875 KNOCKOUTS
L3 L1 165
L4 475 L2
172 6.5
18.7 167
6.8 610
SUCTION 6.6
LIQUID 24.0 X
248
1392 9.8 Z 331749254 2235
54.8 HOTGAS CERT. AGZ-D 10 FAN REMOTE 88.0
BYPASS 140,160,180 DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
5553
LIFTING BRACKETS
IM 1165
IM 1165
378 2286 1826 1719 315 LIFTING WEIGHT.

14.9 90.0 71.9 67.7 12.4
52 19
2.0 .75
M7 L5 QTY. 8 M5 L3 M3 L1 M1
363
14.3 COMPRESSORS
LIQUID CIRCUIT #2
CIR. 2
COMPRESSORS
Figure 39: AGZ190DH (Remote Evaporator)
363 1236
CIRCUIT #1
14.3 48.7
LIQUID SUCTION
CIR. 1 CIR. 2
52
2.0
M8 L6 M6 L4 M4 L2 M2
491 999 897

19.4 1339
52.7 39.3 35.3
HOTGAS SUCTION HOTGAS
BYPASS CIR. 1 BYPASS
4252
167.4 CONTROL
51 BOX
2.0
EXHAUST FANS TYP.
ARE OPTIONAL
282
11.1
299 64
87 11.8 2.5
3.4 POWER ENTRY POINTS
51 127 FIELD CONTROL 64 FRONT OR RIGHT SIDE
2.0 5.0 CONNECTIONS 2.5 22
152 22 .875 KNOCKOUTS
6.0 2538
CG .875 KNOCKOUTS CG
99.9
2413
POWER ENTRY POINTS 95.0
Y ARE ON OPPOSITE SIDE 1116 1116
OF CONTROL BOX 43.9 43.9
1057
41.6 22
.875 KNOCKOUTS
L5 L3 L1
172 L6 471 248 L4 L2 165
6.8 18.5 9.8 6.5
LIQUID 610 CERT. AGZ-D 12 FAN REMOTE 167
SUCTION HOTGAS 6.6
24.0 331749255 X
948 2801
Z 2235
37.3 110.3
88.0
6524 DIMENSION DOES NOT INCLUDE
256.9 LIFTING BRACKETS
35
Lifting and Mounting Weights
Table 11: Lifting Locations
AGZ025D-180D - Approximate Lifting Locations AGZ190D - Approximate Lifting Locations

See Dimension Drawing for location See Dimension Drawing for location
L3 L1 L5 L3 L1
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
L4 L2 L6 L4 L2
Table 12: Lifting Weights - Packaged Chillers (Remote Models next page)
LIFTING WEIGHT BY CORNER LBS (KG)
UNIT MODEL
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
AGZ025D 1053 (478) 806 (366) 729 (331) 561 (254)
AGZ030D 1069 (485) 806 (366) 745 (338) 561 (254)
AGZ035D 1070 (485) 810 (367) 743 (337) 562 (255)
AGZ040D 1084 (492) 829 (376) 766 (347) 586 (266)
AGZ045D 1116 (506) 871 (395) 805 (365) 628 (285)
AGZ050D 1143 (518) 898 (407) 815 (370) 640 (290)
AGZ055D 1150 (522) 908 (412) 820 (372) 647 (293)
AGZ060D 1195 (542) 950 (431) 837 (380) 663 (301)
AGZ065D 1200 (544) 963 (437) 840 (381) 671 (304)
AGZ070D 1297 (588) 943 (428) 1033 (469) 752 (341)
AGZ075D 1710 (776) 1680 (762) 965 (438) 950 (431)
AGZ080D 1720 (780) 1782 (808) 916 (415) 915 (415)
AGZ090D 1716(778) 1680 (762) 994 (451) 975 (442)
AGZ100D 1820 (826) 17833 (809) 1014 (460) 994 (451)
AGZ110D (208/230V) 2235 (1014) 2235 (1014) 1290 (585) 1290 (585)
AGZ110D (380-575V) 2207 (1001) 2210 (1002) 1286 (583) 1287 (584)
AGZ125D (208/230V) 2295 (1041) 2230 (1012) 1350 (612) 1310 (594)
AGZ125D (380-575V) 2270 (1030) 2205 (1030) 1344 (610) 1306 (592)
AGZ130D (208/230V) 2260 (1025) 2260 (1030) 1355 (615 1355 (615)
AGZ130D (380-575V) 2235 (1014) 2235 (1014) 1350 (612) 1350 (612)
AGZ140D 2631 (1193) 2555 (1159) 2092 (949) 2032 (922)
AGZ160D 2715 (1232) 2592 (1176) 2125 (964) 2029 (920)
AGZ180D 2746 (1246) 2670 (1211) 2134 (968) 2075 (941)
AGZ190D 2280 (1034) 2245 (1018) 1823 (827) 1795 (814) 1231 (558) 1212 (550)
36 IM 1165
Table 13: Lifting Weights - Chillers with Remote Evaporators
LIFTING WEIGHT BY CORNER LBS (KG)
UNIT MODEL
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
AGZ025D Remote 1002 (454) 754 (342) 678 (308) 510 (231)
AGZ030D Remote 1017 (461) 745 (338) 703 (319) 515 (234)
AGZ035D Remote 1017 (461) 745 (338) 703 (319) 515 (234)
AGZ040D Remote 1026 (465) 752 (341) 721 (327) 528 (239)
AGZ045D Remote 1054 (478) 784 (356) 758 (344) 564 (256)
AGZ050D Remote 1075 (488) 796 (361) 769 (349) 569 (258)
AGZ055D Remote 1078 (489) 801 (363) 774 (351) 575 (261)
AGZ060D Remote 1103 (500) 820 (372) 792 (359) 589 (267)
AGZ065D Remote 1101 (499) 818 (371) 794 (360) 590 (268)
AGZ070D Remote 1199 (544) 786 (357) 1036 (470) 679 (308)
AGZ075D Remote 1621 (735) 1612 (731) 869 (394) 864 (392)
AGZ080D Remote 1647 (747) 1646 (747) 865 (392) 865 (392)
AGZ090D Remote 1622 (736) 1614 (732) 929 (421) 924 (419)
AGZ100D Remote 1649 (748) 1640 (744) 944 (428) 939 (426)
AGZ110D Remote (208/230V) 2170 (984) 2182 (990) 1183 (537) 1190 (540)
AGZ110D Remote (380-575V) 2109 (957) 2111 (958) 1194 (542) 1195 (542)
AGZ125D Remote (208/230V) 2222 (1008) 2234 (1013) 1212 (550) 1218 (552)
AGZ125D Remote (380-575V) 2193 (995) 2168 (983) 1212 (550) 1198 (543)
AGZ130D Remote (208/230V) 2268 (1029) 2279 (1034) 1216 (552) 1222 (554)
AGZ130D Remote (380-575V) 2212 (1003) 2213 (1004) 1221 (554) 1222 (554)
AGZ140D Remote 2337 (1060) 2310 (1048) 1737 (788) 1716 (778)
AGZ160D Remote 2424 (1100) 2341 (1062) 1768 (802) 1707 (774)
AGZ180D Remote 2449 (1111) 2421 (1098) 1763 (800) 1743 (791)
AGZ190D Remote 2036 (924) 2015 (914) 1594 (723) 1577 (715) 1231 (558) 1212 (550)
IM 1165 37
Figure 40: Mounting Locations
4 or 6 FAN UNIT 8 or 10 FAN UNIT

2 4 2 4 6
CONTROL CONTROL
PANEL PANEL
1 3 1 3 5
1 2 FAN UNIT 2 4 6 8
AGZ 025 – 070 = 4-fan

AGZ 075 – 100 = 6-fan
CO NTROL
AGZ 110 – 130 = 8-fan PA NE L
AGZ 140 – 180 = 10-fan
AGZ 190 = 12-fan
1 3 5 7
Table 14: Isolator Loads at Each Mounting Location (with Aluminum Fins)
Shipping Operating
Fans M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 Copper Fin Weight
Unit Size Weight Weight
(Qty) Add - See Note
lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg)
3148 3163 1028 781 769 584 71
AGZ025D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1428) (1435) (466) (354) (349) (265) (32)
3180 3195 1043 785 780 587 71
AGZ030D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1442) (1449) (473) (356) (354) (266) (32)
3185 3205 1043 789 780 590 72
AGZ035D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1445) (1454) (473) (358) (354) (268) (33)
3265 3285 1060 810 803 613 72
AGZ040D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1481) (1490) (481) (367) (364) (278) (33)
3420 3445 1095 856 839 656 119
AGZ045D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1551) (1563) (497) (388) (381) (297) (54)
3495 3525 1121 880 854 670 119
AGZ050D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1585) (1599) (509) (399) (387) (304) (54)
3525 3555 1128 890 859 678 119
AGZ055D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1599) (1613) (512) (404) (390) (307) (54)
3645 3680 1150 950 866 715 142
AGZ060D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1653) (1669) (522) (431) (393) (324) (65)
3675 3715 1159 961 872 723 142
AGZ065D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1667) (1685) (526) (436) (396) (328) (65)
4025 4065 1288 956 1079 801 142
AGZ070D 4 --- --- --- ---
(1826) (1844) (584) (434) (490) (364) (65)
5305 5350 1697 1667 1063 1044 218
AGZ075D 6 --- --- --- ---
(2406) (2427) (770) (756) (482) (473) (99)
5335 5385 1759 1759 1024 1024 218
AGZ080D 6 --- --- --- ---
(2420) (2443) (798) (798) (464) (464) (99)
5363 5420 1761 1729 1095 1075 218
AGZ090D 6 --- --- --- ---
(2434) (2459) (799) (784) (497) (488) (99)
5610 5675 1806 1773 1118 1098 218
AGZ100D 6 --- --- --- ---
(2545) (2574) (819) (804) (507) (498) (99)
Note: Weight Add for Copper fins is per mounting location
38 IM 1165
Table 15: Isolator Loads at Each Mounting Location (with Aluminum Fins) (continued)
Shipping Operating
Unit Size Weight Weight Add - See Note
(Qty)
AGZ110D 6990 7060 1504 1504 1207 1207 909 909 193
8 --- ---
380-575V (3170) (3202) (682) (682) (547) (547) 412 412 (87)
AGZ110D 7050 7120 1517 1517 1217 1217 917 917 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (3198) (3202) (688) (688) (552) (552) 416 416 (87)
AGZ125D 7125 7205 1577 1534 1263 1229 949 923 193
8 --- ---
380-575V (3232) (3268) (715) (696) (573) (558) 430 419 (87)
AGZ125D 7185 7265 1590 1547 1273 1239 956 931 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (3259) (3295) (721) (702) (578) (562) 434 422 (87)
AGZ130D 7170 7260 1586 1586 1270 1270 954 954 193
8 --- ---
380-575V (3252) (3293) (719) (719) (576) (576) 433 433 (87)
AGZ130D 7230 7320 1598 1598 1280 1280 962 962 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (3078) (3320) (725) (725) (581) (581) 436 436 (87)
8950 9432 1759 1711 1667 1622 1537 1496 266
AGZ140D 10 --- ---
(4060) (4278) (798) (776) (756) (736) 697 678 (121)
9280 9762 1819 1738 1710 1634 1555 1486 266
AGZ160D 10 --- ---
(4209) (4428) (825) (788) (776) (741) 705 674 (121)
9625 10107 1838 1789 1724 1677 1560 1518 266
AGZ180D 10 --- ---
(4366) (4584) (834) (811) (782) (761) 708 689 (121)
10585 11070 2013 1950 1637 1585 1237 737 714 239
AGZ190D 12 1198
(4801) (5021) (913) (884) (742) (719) 561 334 324 (109)
IM 1165 39
Table 16: Remote Evaporator Models - Isolator Loads at Each Mounting Location (with Aluminum Fins)
Shipping Operating
Unit Size Weight Weight
(Qty) Add - See Note
2944 3002 991 746 722 544 71
AGZ025D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1335) (1362) (450) (338) (327) (247) (32)
2980 3046 1009 739 749 549 71
AGZ030D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1352) (1382) (458) (335) (340) (249) (32)
2980 3046 1009 739 749 549 72
AGZ035D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1352) (1382) (458) (335) (340) (249) (33)
3027 3105 1023 749 769 564 72
AGZ040D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1373) (1408) (464) (340) (349) (256) (33)
3160 3248 1055 785 807 601 119
AGZ045D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1433) (1473) (479) (356) (366) (273) (54)
3209 3309 1079 799 822 609 119
AGZ050D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1456) (1501) (489) (362) (373) (276) (54)
3228 3332 1083 805 828 616 119
AGZ055D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1464) (1511) (491) (365) (376) (279) (54)
3303 3411 1109 824 848 630 142
AGZ060D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1498) (1547) (503) (374) (385) (286) (65)
3303 3419 1109 825 851 633 142
AGZ065D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1498) (1551) (503) (374) (386) (287) (65)
3639 3759 1193 801 1054 710 142
AGZ070D Remote 4 --- --- --- ---
(1651) (1705) (542) (363) (479) (322) (65)
4847 4997 1529 1520 977 972 218
AGZ075D Remote 6 --- --- --- ---
(2197) (2267) (694) (690) (444) (441) (99)
4844 5004 1495 1554 978 978 218
AGZ080D Remote 6 --- --- --- ---
(2199) (2270) (679) (706) (444) (444) (99)
4848 5020 1481 1473 1036 1030 218
AGZ090D Remote 6 --- --- --- ---
(2199) (2277) (672) (669) (470) (467) (99)
5052 5228 1568 1560 1053 1048 218
AGZ100D Remote 6 --- --- --- ---
(2292) (2371) (711) (708) (478) (475) (99)
AGZ110D Remote 6429 6633 1319 1320 1135 1136 861 862 193
8 --- ---
460-575V (2916) (3009) (599) (599) (515) (515) 391 391 (87)
AGZ110D Remote 6544 6748 1367 1375 1152 1158 846 850 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (2968) (3061) (621) (624) (523) (525) 384 386 (87)
AGZ125D Remote 6501 6731 1345 1318 1174 1160 872 862 193
8 --- ---
460-575V (2949) (3053) (611) (598) (533) (526) 396 391 (87)
AGZ125D Remote 6616 6846 1395 1353 1194 1170 872 862 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (3001) (3105) (633) (614) (542) (531) 396 391 (87)
AGZ130D Remote 6379 6739 1308 1308 1183 1184 878 879 193
8 --- ---
460-575V (2894) (3057) (594) (594) (537) (537) 398 399 (87)
AGZ130D Remote 6624 6854 1351 1358 1200 1206 868 872 193
8 --- ---
208-230V (3005) (3109) (631) (617) (544) (547) 394 396 (87)
7740 7990 1425 1407 1358 1341 1236 1222 266
AGZ140D Remote 10 --- ---
(3511) (3624) (647) (639) (617) (609) 561 554 (121)
8060 8320 1557 1502 1422 1372 1555 1486 266
(3656) (3744) (706) (682) (646) (623) 705 674 (121)
8375 8635 1625 1606 1469 1453 1248 1234 266
(3799) (3917) (737) (728) (666) (659) 566 560 (121)
9255 9555 1660 1642 1375 1361 1073 1062 695 688 239
AGZ190D Remote 12
(4198) (4334) (753) (745) (624) (617) (487) (482) (316) (312) (109)
40 IM 1165
Figure 41: Sping and RIS Isolators
RP-4 Rubber-in-Shear (RIS) CP-2 Spring Isolator

6.25
5.00
3.75
3.00 ø .500-13NC-2B
R4
4.63
3.87
VM & C
V M& C
.56 TYP. R.28
TYP.
R4
R.250 TYP.
RECESSED
GR IP RIBS R.750 TYP.
DURULENE
MAT ERIAL
1.13 ± .25
APPR OX.
1.63
.38
N OT ES : RAISED GR IP RIBS
1. MO U N T MA TE R IA L T O BE D U R U LE N E R U B BE R .
2. MO LD E D S TE E L A N D E LA S TOM E R M OU N T F OR DRAWING NUMBER 3314814
OU T D OOR S ER V I C E C ON D I TI ON S .
A LL D IM EN S ION S A RE I N D E CI MA L I N CH E S
3. R P -4 M OU N T V ER SI ON W I TH ST U D I N P LA C E .
Table 17: Kit Numbers

Spring Isolator Kit Numbers R-I-S Isolator Kit Numbers
AGZ-D Packaged Unit AGZ-D Packaged Unit
Model Alum inum Fins Copper Fins Model Alum inum Fins Copper Fins
025 332320101 332320101 25 332325101 332325101
030 332320101 332320101 30 332325101 332325101
035 332320101 332320101 35 332325101 332325101
040 332320101 332320101 40 332325101 332325101
045 332320101 332320109 45 332325101 332325101
050 332320101 332320109 50 332325101 332325101
055 332320101 332320109 55 332325101 332325101
060 332320102 332320103 60 332325101 332325101
065 332320102 332320110 65 332325101 332325101
070 332320103 332320110 70 332325101 332325102
075 332320104 332320105 75 332325102 332325102
080 332320105 332320105 80 332325102 332325102
090 332320105 332320105 90 332325102 332325102
100 332320105 332320105 100 332325102 332325102
110 332320106 332320111 110 332325103 332325103
125 332320106 332320111 125 332325103 332325103
130 332320106 332320111 130 332325103 332325103
140 332320107 332320112 140 332325104 332325104
160 332320107 332320112 160 332325104 332325104
180 332320107 332320112 180 332325104 332325104
190 332320108 332320113 190 332325105 332325106
IM 1165 41
Table 18: Isolator Locations (Aluminum Fins)
AGZ-D Rubber-In-Shear (RIS) Mounts Spring Isolator Mountings
Model M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2
025
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Black Black Black
030
035
040
045
050
055
060
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Prpl Black Black
065
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Prpl Black Black
070
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Prpl e
075
Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Prpl Dark Prpl le
080
Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn
090
100
RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2
110
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Prpl Dark Prpl
120
130
140
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Gray Gray Gray Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn
160
180
RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2
190
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Gray Dark Green Dark Green Dark Green Dark Green Black Black
42 IM 1165
Table 19: Isolator Locations (Copper Fins)
AGZ-D Rubber-In-Shear (RIS) Mounts Spring Isolator Mountings
Model M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
025
030
035
040
045
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Black
050
055
060
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Purple
065
Brow n Brow n Brow n Brow n Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn
070
Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn
075
080
090
100
110
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn
120
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn n Dark Grn Dark Grn
130
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brow n Brow n Gray Gray Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn Dark Grn
140
Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
160
180
RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 RP-4 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2 CP-2
190
Lime Lime Lime Lime Brick Red Brick Red Brick Red
Brick Red White White White White Gray Gray Gray Gray
IM 1165 43
Physical Data - Packaged Units
Table 20: Physical Data - AGZ025D - AGZ040D

AGZ-DH (Packaged Chiller) Model Num ber
PHYSICAL DATA 25 30 35 40
BASIC DATA Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2
Unit Capacity @ AHRI Conditions (See Note 1), Tons (kW) 27 (96) 32 (111) 35 (123) 38 (133)
Number Of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2 2
28 28 32 32 32 32 39 39
Unit Operating Charge, R-410A, lbs (kg)
(13) (13) (15) (15) (15) (15) (17) (17)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4
Cabinet Dimensions, L x W x H, in. (mm)
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 3163 (1435) 3195 (1449) 3205 (1454) 3285 (1490)
Unit Shipping Weight, lbs (kg) 3148 (1428) 3180 (1442) 3185 (1445) 3265 (1481)
Add'l Weight for Copper Finned Coils, lbs (kg) 315 (143) 315 (143) 315 (143) 531 (241)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Upper, lbs (kg) 167 (76) 167 (76) 167 (76) 167 (76)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Low er, lbs (kg) 144 (65) 144 (65) 144 (65) 144 (65)
COMPRESSORS
Type Tandem Scrolls Tandem Scrolls Tandem Scrolls Tandem Scrolls
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 7.5 7.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 10 10 10
Number Of Compressors per Circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
85 85 110 110 110 110 110 110
Oil Charge Per Compressor, oz (g)
(2410) (2410) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119)
CAPACITY REDUCTION STEPS - PERCENT OF COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT
Staging, 4 Stages, Circuit #1 in Lead 0-25-50-75-100 0-25-50-75-100 23-50-73-100 0-25-50-75-100
CONDENSERS - HIGH EFFICIENCY FIN AND TUBE TYPE WITH INTEGRAL SUBCOOLING
Coil Face Area, ft2 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 44.1 44.1
Coil Face Area, (m2) 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.1 4.1
50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6
Finned Height x Finned Length, in. (mm)
(1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920)
Fins Per Inch x Row s Deep 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 2 16 x 2
Pumpdow n Capacity, 90% Full lbs (kg) 40 (18) 40 (18) 40 (18) 40 (18) 40 (18) 40 (18) 47 (21) 47 (21)
CONDENSER FANS - DIRECT DRIVE PROPELLER TYPE
Number Of Fans - Fan Diameter, in. (mm) 4 – 30 (762) 4 – 30 (762) 4 – 30 (762) 4 – 30 (762)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) (Note 2) 4 – 1.5 (1.1) 4 – 1.5 (1.1) 4 – 1.5 (1.1) 4 – 1.5 (1.1)
Fan And Motor RPM, 60Hz 1140 1140 1140 1140
60 Hz Fan Tip Speed, FPM (m/sec) 8950 (45) 8950 (45) 8950 (45) 8950 (45)
60 Hz Total Unit Airflow , CFM (l/sec) 24,316 (11,478) 24,316 (11,478) 24,316 (11,478) 39,600 (18,692)
EVAPORATOR - BRAZED PLATE-TO-PLATE
Number of Evaporators 1 1 1 1
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2 2
Water Volume, Gallons, (l) 2.01 (7.6) 2.01 (7.6) 2.22 (8.4) 2.43 (9.2)
Maximum Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Max. Refrig. Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Conn. in. (mm) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65)
Drain - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping
Vent - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping
Note 1: Nominal capacity based on 95° F ambient air and 54° F/44° F water range.
Note 2: For all 380V/60 & 575V/60 models, HP = 2.0.
Note 3: Water connection shown is nominal pipe size.
Note 4: Brazed plate evaporators do not have drain or vent connections integral to the heat exchanger. The connections must be installed in the field inlet and
outlet piping as shown in Piping Section beginning on page 8.
44 IM 1165
Unit Capacity @ AHRI Conditions (See Note 1), Tons
(kW) 43 (150) 48 (169) 52 (181) 56 (197)
44 44 50 50 52 52 54 54
(20) (20) (23) (23) (24) (24) (25) (25)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
COMPRESSORS
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 11.5 11.5 13 13 13 15 15 15
110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
(3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119)
Staging, 4 Stages, Circuit #1 in Lead 0-25-50-75-100 0-25-50-75-100 0-23-50-73-100 0-25-50-75-100
Coil Face Area, ft2 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1
Coil Face Area, (m2) 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1
42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6
(1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920)
Maximum Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Connections, in. (mm) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 3 (80)
IM 1165 45
PHYSICAL DATA 65 70
BASIC DATA Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2
Unit Capacity @ AHRI Conditions (See Note 1), Tons (kW) 58 (204) 64 (225)
Number Of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2
58 58 60 60
(26) (26) (27) (27)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 3715 (1683) 4065 (1844)
Unit Shipping Weight, lbs (kg) 3675 (1665) 4025 (1826)
Add'l Weight for Copper Finned Coils, lbs (kg) 631 (286) 631 (286)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Upper, lbs (kg) 167 (76) 167 (76)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Low er, lbs (kg) 144 (65) 144 (65)
COMPRESSORS
Type Tandem Scrolls Tandem Scrolls
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 15 15 15/20 15/20
Number Of Compressors per Circuit 2 2 2 2
110 110 110/135 110/135
(3119) (3119) 3119/3827 3119/3827
Staging, 4 Stages, Circuit #1 in Lead 0-25-50-75-100 0-21-50-71-100
Coil Face Area, ft2 52.6 52.6 52.6 52.6
Coil Face Area, (m2) 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9
50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6
(1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920)
Fins Per Inch x Row s Deep 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3
Pumpdow n Capacity, 90% Full lbs (kg) 81 (37) 81 (37) 81 (37) 81 (37)
Number Of Fans - Fan Diameter, in. (mm) 4 – 30 (762) 4 – 30 (762)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) (2) 4 – 2.0 (1.5) 4 – 2.0 (1.5)
Fan And Motor RPM, 60Hz 1140 1140
60 Hz Fan Tip Speed, FPM (m/sec) 8950 (45) 8950 (45)
60 Hz Total Unit Airflow , CFM (l/sec) 43,452 (20,510) 43,452 (20,510)
Number of Evaporators 1 1
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2
Water Volume, Gallons, (l) 4.76 (18.0) 4.76 (18.0)
Maximum Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Maximum Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Connections, in. (mm) 3 (80) 3 (80)
Drain - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping
Vent - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping
46 IM 1165
(kW) 73 (257) 81 (285) 89 (314) 100 (351)
75 75 80 80 86 86 88 88
(34) (34) (36) (36) (39) (39) (40) (40)
134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4
(3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550)
COMPRESSORS
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 20 20 20 25 25 25 25/30 25/30
135 135 135 145 145 145 145/213 145/213
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111) (4111/6038) (4111/6038)
Coil Face Area, ft2 66.2 66.2 66.2 66.2 78.8 78.8 78.8 78.8
Coil Face Area, (m2) 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3
42 x113.4 42 x113.4 42 x113.4 42 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4
(1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5)
EVAPORATOR – BRAZED PLATE-TO-PLATE
Number of Evaporators 1 1 1 1,
Max. Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Max. Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet/Outlet Victaulic Conn. in. (mm) 3 (80) 3 (80) 3 (80) 3 (80)
IM 1165 47
AGZ-DH (Packaged Chiller) 208/230 volt m odels
PHYSICAL DATA 110 125 130
BASIC DATA Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2
Unit Capacity @ AHRI Conditions (See Note 1), Tons (kW) 106 (373) 117 (412) 130 (456)
Number Of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2
102 102 115 115 115 115
(46) (46) (52) (52) (52) (52)
173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4
(4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 7120 (3230) 7265(3295) 7320 (3320)
Unit Shipping Weight, lbs (kg) 7050 (3198) 7185 (3259) 7230 (3280)
Add'l Weight for Copper Finned Coils, lbs (kg) 1070 (486) 1269 (576) 1269 (576)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Upper, lbs (kg) 307 (139) 307 (139) 307 (139)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Low er, lbs (kg) 230 (105) 230 (105) 230 (105)
COMPRESSORS
Type Trio Scrolls Trio Scrolls Trio Scrolls
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 20 20 20 25 25 25
Number Of Compressors per Circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3
135 135 135 145 145 145
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111)
Staging, 6 Stages, Circuit #1 in Lead 0-17-33-50-67-83-100 0-15-33-48-67-81-100 0-17-33-50-67-83-100
Coil Face Area, ft2 88.4 88.4 105.3 105.3 105.3 105.3
Coil Face Area, (m2) 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
42 x151.6 42 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6
(1069x3851) (1069x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851)
Fins Per Inch x Row s Deep 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3
Pumpdow n Capacity, 90% Full lbs (kg) 142/64 142/64 166/75 166/75 166/75 166/75
Number Of Fans - Fan Diameter, in. (mm) 8 – 30 (762) 8 – 30 (762) 8 – 30 (762)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) 8 – 2.0 (1.5) 8 – 2.0 (1.5) 8 – 2.0 (1.5)
Fan And Motor RPM, 60Hz 1140 1140 1140
60 Hz Fan Tip Speed, FPM (m/sec) 8950 (45) 8950 (45) 8950 (45)
60 Hz Total Unit Airflow , CFM (l/sec) 81,600 (38,517) 86,904 (41,020) 86,904 (41,020)
Number of Evaporators 1 1 1
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2
Water Volume, Gallons, (l) 8.32 (31.5) 9.51 (36.0) 10.7 (40.5)
Max. Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Max. Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Conn, in. (mm) 3 (80) 3 (80) 3 (80)
Drain - NPT int, in. (mm) (N ote 3) Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping
Vent - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 3) Field Piping Field Piping Field Piping
48 IM 1165
AGZ-DH (Packaged Chiller) 380-575 volt m odels
(kW) 106 (373) 117 (412) 130 (456)
102 102 115 115 115 115
(46) (46) (52) (52) (52) (52)
173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4
(4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 7060(3202) 7205 (3268) 7260 (3293)
COMPRESSORS
135 135 135 145 145 145
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111)
Coil Face Area, ft2 88.4 88.4 105.3 105.3 105.3 105.3
Coil Face Area, (m2) 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
42 x151.6 42 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6
(1069x3851) (1069x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851)
IM 1165 49
Physical Data - Remote Evaporator Units

AGZ-DB Rev 0A Rem ote Evaporator Model
28 28 32 32 32 32 39 39
(13) (13) (15) (15) (15) (15) (17) (17)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
COMPRESSORS
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 7.5 7.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 10 10 10
85 85 110 110 110 110 110 110
(2410) (2410) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119)
Coil Face Area, ft2 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 26.3 44.1 44.1
Coil Face Area, (m2) 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.1 4.1
50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6
(1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920)
REMOTE EVAPORATOR - BRAZED PLATE-TO-PLATE
Evaporator Model ACH-230DQ-78H ACH-230DQ-78H ACH-230DQ-86H ACH-230DQ-94H
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 84 (38.1) 84 (38.1) 91 (41.3) 98 (44.5)
50 IM 1165
44 44 50 50 52 52 54 54
(20) (20) (23) (23) (24) (24) (25) (25)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
COMPRESSORS
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 11.5 11.5 13 13 13 15 15 15
110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
(3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119) (3119)
Coil Face Area, ft2 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1 44.1
Coil Face Area, (m2) 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1
42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6 42x75.6
(1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920) (1067x1920)
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 112 (50.1) 126 (57.2) 133 (60.3) 158 (71.7)
Maximum Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Connections, in. (mm) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 2.5 (65) 3 (80)
IM 1165 51
PHYSICAL DATA 65 70
BASIC DATA Ckt.1 Ckt.2 Ckt.1 Ckt.2
Unit Capacity @ AHRI Conditions (See Note 1), Tons (kW) 58 (204) 64 (225)
Number Of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2
58 58 60 60
(26) (26) (27) (27)
94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4 94.4 x 88.0 x 100.4
(2398 x 2235 x 2550) (2398 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 3419 (1551) 3759 (1705)
Unit Shipping Weight, lbs (kg) 3303 (1498) 3639 (1651)
Add'l Weight for Copper Finned Coils, lbs (kg) 631 (286) 631 (286)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Upper, lbs (kg) 167 (76) 167 (76)
Add'l Weight for Optional Louvers - Low er, lbs (kg) 144 (65) 144 (65)
COMPRESSORS
Type Tandem Scrolls Tandem Scrolls
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 15 15 15/20 15/20
Number Of Compressors per Circuit 2 2 2 2
110 110 110/135 110/135
(3119) (3119) 3119/3827 3119/3827
Coil Face Area, ft2 52.6 52.6 52.6 52.6
Coil Face Area, (m2) 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9
50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6 50x75.6
(1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920) (1270x1920)
Fins Per Inch x Row s Deep 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3 16 x 3
Pumpdow n Capacity, 90% Full lbs (kg) 81 (37) 81 (37) 81 (37) 81 (37)
Number Of Fans - Fan Diameter, in. (mm) 4 – 30 (762) 4 – 30 (762)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) (2) 4 – 2.0 (1.5) 4 – 2.0 (1.5)
Fan And Motor RPM, 60Hz 1140 1140
60 Hz Fan Tip Speed, FPM (m/sec) 8950 (45) 8950 (45)
60 Hz Total Unit Airflow , CFM (l/sec) 43,452 (20,510) 43,452 (20,510)
Number of Evaporators 1 1
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2
Evaporator Model ACH-500DQ-82H ACH-500DQ-82H
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 180 (81.7) 180 (81.7)
Water Volume, Gallons, (l) 4.9 (18.6) 4.9 (18.6)
Maximum Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Maximum Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet / Outlet Victaulic Connections, in. (mm) 3 (80) 3 (80)
Drain - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping
Vent - NPT int, in. (mm) (Note 4) Field Piping Field Piping
52 IM 1165
75 75 80 80 86 86 88 88
(34) (34) (36) (36) (39) (39) (40) (40)
134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4 134.9 x 88.0 x 100.4
(3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550) (3426 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 4997(2267) 5004 (2270) 5020 (2277) 5228 (2371)
COMPRESSORS
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 20 20 20 25 25 25 25/30 25/30
135 135 135 145 145 145 145/213 145/213
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111) 4111/6038 4111/6038
Coil Face Area, ft2 66.2 66.2 66.2 66.2 78.8 78.8 78.8 78.8
Coil Face Area, (m2) 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3
42 x113.4 42 x113.4 42 x113.4 42 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4 50 x113.4
(1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1069x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880) (1270x2880)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5) 6 – 2.0 (1.5)
Number of Evaporators 1 1 1 1,
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 207 (93.9) 230 (104.3) 244 (110.7) 281 (127.5)
Max. Water Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Max. Refrigerant Working Pressure, psig (kPa) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502) 653 (4502)
Water Inlet/Outlet Victaulic Conn. in. (mm) 3 (80) 3 (80) 3 (80) 3 (80)
IM 1165 53
Table 30: Physical Data - AGZ110D - AGZ130D - 208/230 Volt Models (380-575 Volts Next Page)
AGZ-DB Rev 0A Rem ote Evaporator Model - 208/230 Volt Models
102 102 115 115 115 115
(46) (46) (52) (52) (52) (52)
173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4
(4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 6748 (3061) 6846(3105) 6854 (3109)
COMPRESSORS
135 135 135 145 145 145
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111)
Coil Face Area, ft2 88.4 88.4 105.3 105.3 105.3 105.3
Coil Face Area, (m2) 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
42 x151.6 42 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6
(1069x3851) (1069x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851)
Evaporator Model ACH-500DQ-142H ACH-500DQ-162H ACH-500DQ-182H
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 296 (134.3) 333 (151.1) 370 (167.8)
NOTE: This table for 208/230V models only. Information for 380V, 460V, and 575V models next page.
54 IM 1165
Table 31: Physical Data - AGZ110D - AGZ130D - 380-575 Volt Models (208/230 Volts Previous Page)
AGZ-DB Rev 0A Rem ote Evaporator Model 380-575 Volt Models
102 102 115 115 115 115
(46) (46) (52) (52) (52) (52)
173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4 173.1 x 88.0 x 100.4
(4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550) (4397 x 2235 x 2550)
Unit Operating Weight, lbs (kg) 6633 (3009) 6731 (3053) 6739 (3057)
COMPRESSORS
135 135 135 145 145 145
(3827) (3827) (3827) (4111) (4111) (4111)
Coil Face Area, ft2 88.4 88.4 105.3 105.3 105.3 105.3
Coil Face Area, (m2) 8.2 8.2 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
42 x151.6 42 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6 50 x151.6
(1069x3851) (1069x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851) (1270x3851)
Evaporator Model ACH-500DQ-142H ACH-500DQ-162H ACH-500DQ-182H
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 296 (134.3) 333 (151.1) 370 (167.8)
IM 1165 55
Unit Capacity @ AHRI (See Note 1), Tons (kW) 136 (479) 153 (539) 172 (605) 180 (633)
125 125 130 130 130 130 140 140
(57) (57) (59) (59) (59) (59) (64) (64)
218.6 x 88.0 x 100.4 218.6 x 88.0 x 100.4 218.6 x 88.0 x 100.4 256.9 x 88.0 x 100.4
(5552 x 2235 x 2545) (5552 x 2235 x 2545) (5552 x 2235 x 2545) (6525 x 2235 x 2545)
COMPRESSORS
Type Trio Scrolls Trio Scrolls Trio Scrolls Trio Scrolls
Nominal tonnage of each Compressor 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30
145 145 145 213 213 213 213 213
(4111) (4111) (4111) (6038) (6038) (6038) (6038) (6038)
Staging, 6 Stages, Circuit #1 in Lead 0-17-33-50-67-83-100 0-15-33-48-67-81-100 0-17-33-50-67-83-100 0-17-33-50-67-83-100
Staging, 6 Stages, Circuit #2 in Lead 0-17-33-50-67-83-100 0-19-33-52-67-86-100 0-17-33-50-67-83-100 0-17-33-50-67-83-100
Coil Face Area, ft2 131.8 131.8 131.8 131.8 131.8 131.8 158.3 158.3
Coil Face Area, (m2) 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 14.7 14.7
50 x 190 50 x 190 50 x 190 50 x 190 50 x 190 50 x 190 50 x 228 50 x 228
(1270x4821) (1270x4821) (1270x4821) (1270x4821) (1270x4821) (1270x4821) (1270x5791) (1270x5791)
Number Of Motors - HP (kW) 10 – 2.0 (1.5) 10 – 2.0 (1.5) 10 – 2.0 (1.5) 12 - 2.0 (1.5)
REMOTE EVAPORATOR - SHELL-AND-TUBE
Evaporator Model EV34191010/9 EV34191111/9 EV34191111/9 EV34191212/7
Dry Weight lbs (kg) 840 (381) 840 (381) 870 (395) 900 (408)
Water Volume, Gallons, (l) 58.8 (223) 57.8 (219) 57.8 (219) 56.8 (215)
Drain - NPT int, in. ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF
Vent - NPT int, in. ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF ½-in. NPTF
56 IM 1165
Pressure Drop Data
Pressure Drop Data
Figure 42: Pressure Drop Curves

100 A
B
C
D
U
E
F T
G F S
CD E G J K LM NO P Q
H B H R
I
I
A
J
K
L F
CD E GH J K LM NO P Q
)t M B
f( I
p10 N
A
D U
O
P T
Q S
R R
S
T
U
F
CD E G J K M O P Q
B H L N
I
A
1
10 100 1000
Flow Rate (gpm)
Table 33: Pressure Drop Data

Variable Flow System Only Fixed Flow System Only Fixed and Variable Flow Systems
Minimum Flow Rate Minimum Flow Rate Nominal Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate
Evapora
Curve IP SI IP SI IP SI IP SI
Model tor
Ref.
Type GPM DP ft. lps DP kpa gpm DP ft. lps DP kpa gpm DP ft. lps DP kpa gpm DP ft. lps DP kpa
A 025D 26.4 1.6 1.7 4.8 41.3 3.8 2.6 11.5 66.0 9.4 4.2 28.1 105.6 23.0 6.7 68.6
B 030D 30.3 2.2 1.9 6.4 47.4 5.0 3.0 15.0 75.8 12.3 4.8 36.7 121.3 30.0 7.7 89.7
C 035D 33.5 2.4 2.1 7.1 51.8 5.4 3.3 16.3 82.8 13.3 5.2 39.7 132.5 32.5 8.4 97.0
D 040D 36.4 2.4 2.3 7.1 56.4 5.4 3.6 16.3 90.2 13.3 5.7 39.7 144.4 32.5 9.1 97.0
E 045D 40.9 2.3 2.6 6.9 63.5 5.3 4.0 15.9 101.5 13.0 6.4 38.8 162.4 31.8 10.2 94.8
F 050D 46.2 2.6 2.9 7.8 72.2 6.1 4.6 18.2 115.4 14.9 7.3 44.5 184.7 36.4 11.7 108.7
G 055D 49.5 2.3 3.1 7.0 77.4 5.4 4.9 16.3 123.8 13.3 7.8 39.7 198.1 32.5 12.5 97.0
H 060D 53.8 2.2 3.4 6.6 84.2 5.1 5.3 15.3 134.6 12.5 8.5 37.3 215.4 30.5 13.6 91.2
Brazed
I 065D 55.8 1.9 3.5 5.8 87.2 4.5 5.5 13.4 139.4 11.0 8.8 32.8 223.1 26.9 14.1 80.2
Plate
J 070D 61.5 2.3 3.9 7.0 96.2 5.4 6.1 16.3 153.8 13.3 9.7 39.7 246.1 32.5 15.5 97.0
K 075D 70.2 2.3 4.4 6.8 109.7 5.3 6.9 15.8 175.4 12.9 11.1 38.5 280.7 31.5 17.7 94.1
L 080D 77.8 2.2 4.9 6.7 121.7 5.2 7.7 15.6 194.6 12.8 12.3 38.2 311.4 31.3 19.7 93.4
M 090D 85.6 2.4 5.4 7.1 132.3 5.4 8.3 16.1 211.7 13.2 13.4 39.4 338.7 32.2 21.4 96.3
N 100D 95.8 2.2 6.0 6.6 149.7 5.2 9.4 15.4 239.5 12.6 15.1 37.6 383.2 30.8 24.2 91.9
O 110D 101.8 2.3 6.4 6.8 159.2 5.3 10.0 15.9 254.6 13.0 16.1 38.8 407.4 31.8 25.7 94.8
P 125D 112.4 2.3 7.1 6.9 175.7 5.4 11.1 16.1 281.0 13.2 17.7 39.4 449.7 32.2 28.4 96.3
Q 130D 124.3 2.4 7.8 7.2 194.3 5.5 12.3 16.5 310.8 13.5 19.6 40.3 497.3 33.0 31.4 98.5
R 140D 204.3 4.8 12.9 14.4 204.3 4.8 12.9 14.4 326.9 11.8 20.6 35.2 523.0 28.8 33.0 86.1
Shell-
S 160D 229.9 5.9 14.5 17.7 230.0 5.9 14.5 17.7 367.9 14.5 23.2 43.3 588.7 35.4 37.1 105.8
and-
T 180D 258.3 7.4 16.3 22.0 258.3 7.4 16.3 22.0 413.3 18.0 26.1 53.7 661.2 44.0 41.7 131.3
Tube
U 190D 270.1 9.0 17.0 26.9 270.2 9.0 17.0 26.9 432.2 22.0 27.3 65.7 691.6 53.7 43.6 160.5
Table 34:
IM 1165 57
Electrical Data
Electrical Data
Electrical Data Notes Table 36: Standard Panel Rating

Notes for Unit Amp Draw: AGZ-D Model Size 208V 230V 380V 460V 575V
1 Compressor RLA values are for wire sizing purposes 025-080, 125 5kA 5kA 5kA 5kA 5kA
only. Normal operating current draw at rated capacity 090-110, 130-160 5kA 5kA 10kA 5kA 5kA
may be less than the RLA value. 180,190 5kA 10kA 10kA 10kA 5kA
Notes for Electrical Data Single- and Multi-Point Circuit Breakers
1 Unit wire size ampacity (MCA) is equal to 125% of the Factory installed compressor circuit breakers are standard on
largest compressor-motor RLA plus 100% of RLA of all units with single point power supply only. This option provides
other loads in the circuit. compressor short circuit protection and makes servicing easier
2 The control transformer is furnished and no separate .Electrical Control Center
115V power is required. For both single- and multi-point Operating and equipment protection controls and motor
power connections, the control transformer is in circuit starting components are separately housed in a centrally
#1 with control power wired from there to circuit #2. In located, weather resistant control panel with hinged and tool-
multi-point power, disconnecting power to circuit #1 locked doors. In addition to the MicroTech III controller
disconnects control power to the unit. described in the next sections, the following components are
3 Wire sizing amps is 10 amps if a separate 115V power housed in the panel:
supply is used for the control circuit.
• Power terminal blocks, multi-point connection standard
4 Recommended power lead wire sizes for 3 conductors
• Control, input, and output terminal block
per conduit are based on 100% conductor ampacity in
• Control transformer
accordance with NEC. Voltage drop has not been
• Optional disconnect switch (through-the-door handle)
included. It is recommended that power leads be kept
• Compressor motor inherent thermal and overload protec-
short. All terminal block connections must be made with
tion is standard
copper (type THW) wire.
• Optional phase voltage monitor with under/over voltage
5 Recommended Fuse Sizes are selected at approximately
and phase reversal protection
175% of the largest compressor RLA, plus 100% of all
• Fan contactors with short circuit protective devices.
other loads in the circuit.
• Optional ground fault protection
6 Maximum Fuse or breaker size is equal to 225% of the
• FanTrol fan staging head pressure control system
largest compressor RLA, plus 100% of all other loads.
• Power connections are per the following table
7 The recommended power wire sizes are based on an
ambient temperature of 86°F (30°C). Ampacity Power Connections
correction factors must be applied for other ambient Table 37: Power Connection Availability
Comp Panel High Short
temperatures. Refer to the NEC Handbook. Power Connection
Power Disc.
Circuit Circuit Current
Block Swt.
8 Must be electrically grounded according to national and Breakers Rating
local electrical codes. AGZ025D-190D
Std Opt. Std Opt
Optional Single Point
Notes for Wiring Data
AGZ025D-190D
1 Single-point power supply requires a single disconnect to Std Opt. Not Avail. Opt.
Standard Multi-Point
supply electrical power to the unit. This power supply
must either be fused or use a circuit breaker. Definitions:
2 All field wiring to unit power block or optional non-
1 Power Block: An electrical device to directly accept field
fused disconnect switch must be copper.
wiring without any disconnecting means.
3 All field wire size values given in table apply to 75°C
2 Disconnect Switch: A molded case switch that accepts
rated wire per NEC.
field wiring and disconnects main power to the entire
Voltage Limitations: unit or each main power supply if the multi-point power
1 Within 10 percent of nameplate rating. supply option is selected. This option does not provide
2 Voltage unbalance not to exceed 2% with a resultant overcurrent protection.
current unbalance of 6 to 10 times the voltage unbalance 3 Compressor Circuit Breakers: A manually reset circuit
per NEMA MG-1, 2009 Standard Rev. 1-2010. breaker for each compressor, providing compressor only
short circuit protection and located ahead of the
Table 35: HSSCR Panel Rating
contactor.
AGZ-D Model Size 208V-230V 380V-460V 575V
4 Control Panel High Short Circuit Current Rating:
025-065 100kA 65kA 25kA (Previously known as "withstand rating"). The entire
070-190 100kA 65kA 25kA control panel is designed for short circuit current rating
as shown above. In the event of a short circuit, the
damage is contained within the control panel enclosure.
58 IM 1165
Field Wiring Diagram
Figure 43: Typical Field Wiring Diagram (Single-point connection)

FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM
WITH MICROTECH CONTROLLER
PANEL
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT SWITCH

(BY OTHERS) OR
POWER BLOCK
L1 T1
3 PHASE TO
POWER L2 T2 COMPRESSOR(S)
SOURCE AND FAN MOTORS
L3 T3
FU4 FU5
T1
TB1
35 120 VAC
CHW1
FU6 301 120 299
PUMP NO.1 RELAY DISCONNECT
CONTROL CIRCUIT VAC
(BY OTHERS) (BY OTHERS)
FUSE
120VAC @ 1.0AMP MAX
TB1 SEE NOTE 1 TB1 22 N
33 N FIELD
301A SUPPLIED
TB1 FU
OPTION
1A 120 VAC
15A for 1.5 KVA
30A for 3.0KVA
TB1 (BY OTHERS)
P2+ 120 VAC Notes:
CHW2 1.) IF FIELD SUPPLIED, CONTROL
PUMP NO.2 RELAY POWER USER MUST REMOVE
(BY OTHERS) FU6, AND WIRE NUMBERS 299, 301A
120VAC @ 1.0AMP MAX INSIDE CONTROL PANEL
TB1
31 N
ALARM BELL
RELAY (FACTORY WIRING)
(BY OTHERS)
TB1
34 120 VAC
ABR
ALARM
BELL OPTION
TB1
32A
GND
(317)
TIME OFF
CLOCK TB2
52
AUTO IF REMOTE STOP
REMOTE CONTROL IS USED
STOP SWITCH 585 REMOVE LEAD 585
(BY OTHERS) ON FROM TERM ALARM BELL
TB2 TB2-52 TO TB2-72 TB2 RELAY
72 43
MANUAL COM NO
ABR
ALARM BELL
OFF OPTION
TIME BELL
TB2 1 2
CLOCK TB2
83
54
AUTO
ICE MODE
SWITCH
(BY OTHERS) ON
TB2
74 TB2
MANUAL
45
CHW FLOW SWITCH EXTERNAL
-MANDATORY- ALARM/
(BY OTHERS) NOR. OPEN PUMP EVENT
AUX. CONTACTS TB2
(OPTIONAL) TB2 67
44
TB2
61
TB2
+ 68
4-20MA FOR
EVAP. WATER RESET
TB2
(BY OTHERS) _
69
TB2
+ 70
4-20MA FOR
DEMAND LIMIT
TB2
(BY OTHERS) _
71
TB2
91 24 VAC
LIQUID LINE #1
SOLENOID
24VAC 1.5 AMP MAX
TB2
93A N
LESS SV1
EVAPORATOR
ONLY TB2
92 24 VAC
LIQUID LINE #2
SOLENOID
24VAC 1.5 AMP MAX
TB2
93A N
SV2
IM 1165 59
Figure 44: Typical Field Wiring Diagram (Multi-point connection)
FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM
WITH MICROTECH CONTROLLER
PANEL
DISCONNECT 1 DISCONNECT SWITCH

(BY OTHERS) OR
POWER BLOCK
L1 T1
3 PHASE TO CIRCUIT 1
L3 T3
FU4 FU5
Notes:
T1 1.) IF FIELD SUPPLIED, CONTROL
POWER USER MUST REMOVE
FU6, AND WIRE NUMBERS 299, 301A
INSIDE CONTROL PANEL
FU6 301 120 299

DISCONNECT
CONTROL CIRCUIT VAC (BY OTHERS)
FUSE
SEE NOTE 1 TB1 22 N
FIELD
301A SUPPLIED
TB1 FU
OPTION
1A 120 VAC
15A for 1.5 KVA
DISCONNECT 2 DISCONNECT SWITCH
30A for 3.0KVA
(BY OTHERS) OR
(BY OTHERS)
POWER BLOCK
L1 T1
3 PHASE TO CIRCUIT 2
L3 T3
TB1
35 120 VAC
CHW1
PUMP NO.1 RELAY
(BY OTHERS)
120VAC @ 1.0AMP MAX
TB1
33 N
TB1
P2+ 120 VAC
CHW2
PUMP NO.2 RELAY
(BY OTHERS)
120VAC @ 1.0AMP MAX
TB1
31 N
ALARM BELL
RELAY (FACTORY WIRING)
(BY OTHERS)
TB1
34 120 VAC
ABR
ALARM
BELL OPTION
TB1
32A
GND
TIME OFF (317)
CLOCK TB2
52
AUTO IF REMOTE STOP
REMOTE CONTROL IS USED ALARM BELL
STOP SWITCH 585 REMOVE LEAD 585 TB2 RELAY
(BY OTHERS) ON FROM TERM
TB2 43
TB2-52 TO TB2-72 COM NO
72 ABR
MANUAL ALARM BELL
OPTION
BELL
TB2 1 2
TIME OFF 83
CLOCK TB2
54
AUTO
ICE MODE
SWITCH
(BY OTHERS) ON
TB2 TB2
74 45
MANUAL
EXTERNAL
ALARM/
CHW FLOW SWITCH EVENT
-MANDATORY- TB2
(BY OTHERS) NOR. OPEN PUMP 67
AUX. CONTACTS
(OPTIONAL) TB2
44
TB2
61
TB2
+ 68
4-20MA FOR
EVAP. WATER RESET
TB2
(BY OTHERS) _
69
TB2
+ 70
4-20MA FOR
DEMAND LIMIT
TB2
(BY OTHERS) _
71
TB2
91 24 VAC
LIQUID LINE #1
SOLENOID
24VAC 1.5 AMP MAX
TB2
93A N
LESS SV1
EVAPORATOR
ONLY TB2
92 24 VAC
LIQUID LINE #2
SOLENOID
24VAC 1.5 AMP MAX
TB2
93A N
SV2
60 IM 1165
Table 38: Unit Amp Draw, 50 & 60 Hz
AGZ-D Volts/ Rated Load Amps Locked Rotor Amps Fan Motors
Size Phase Circuit #1 Circuit #2 Circuit #1 Circuit #2
#1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 #1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 Qty FLA (ea) LRA (ea)
208V/60 29.5 29.5 29.5 29.5 195 195 195 195 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 29.5 29.5 29.5 29.5 195 195 195 195 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 16.7 16.7 16.7 16.7 123 123 123 123 4 4.1 20.0
025D
460V/60 14.7 14.7 14.7 14.7 95 95 95 95 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 14.7 14.7 14.7 14.7 95 95 95 95 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 80 80 80 80 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 31.6 31.6 31.6 31.6 225 225 225 225 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 225 225 225 225 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2 140 140 140 140 4 4.1 20.0
030D
460V/60 16.7 16.7 16.7 16.7 114 114 114 114 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 16.7 16.7 16.7 16.7 111 111 111 111 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 80 80 80 80 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 31.6 31.6 36.3 36.3 225 225 239 239 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 30.1 30.1 36.0 36.0 225 225 239 239 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 19.2 19.2 23.7 23.7 140 140 145 145 4 4.1 20.0
035D
460V/60 16.7 16.7 17.9 17.9 114 114 125 125 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 16.7 16.7 17.9 17.9 111 111 118 118 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 80 80 80 80 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 36.3 36.3 36.3 36.3 239 239 239 239 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 239 239 239 239 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 23.7 23.7 23.7 23.7 145 145 145 145 4 4.1 20.0
040D
460V/60 17.9 17.9 17.9 17.9 125 125 125 125 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 17.9 17.9 17.9 17.9 118 118 118 118 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 80 80 80 80 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 48.1 48.1 48.1 48.1 245 245 245 245 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 48.1 48.1 48.1 48.1 245 245 245 245 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 23.7 23.7 23.7 23.7 145 145 145 145 4 4.1 20.0
045D
460V/60 18.9 18.9 18.9 18.9 125 125 125 125 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 18.9 18.9 18.9 18.9 118 118 118 118 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 100 100 100 100 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 300 300 300 300 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 52.8 52.8 52.8 52.8 300 300 300 300 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 139 139 139 139 4 4.1 20.0
050D
460V/60 23.1 23.1 23.1 23.1 150 150 150 150 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 23.1 23.1 23.1 23.1 140 140 140 140 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 19.9 19.9 19.9 19.9 109 109 109 109 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 52.8 52.8 56.6 56.6 300 300 340 340 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 52.8 52.8 55.8 55.8 300 300 340 340 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 26.9 26.9 34.0 34.0 139 139 196 196 4 4.1 20.0
055D
460V/60 23.1 23.1 26.9 26.9 150 150 173 173 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 23.1 23.1 26.9 26.9 140 140 173 173 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 19.9 19.9 23.7 23.7 109 109 132 132 4 3.0 14.0
IM 1165 61
Table 39: Unit Amp Draw, 50 & 60 Hz continued
#1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 #1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 Qty FLA (ea) LRA (ea)
208V/60 56.6 56.6 56.6 56.6 340 340 340 340 4 5.8 23.3
230V/60 55.8 55.8 55.8 55.8 340 340 340 340 4 5.8 23.3
380V/60 34.0 34.0 34.0 34.0 196 196 196 196 4 4.1 20.0
060D
460V/60 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 173 173 173 173 4 2.8 13.0
400V/50 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 173 173 173 173 4 2.8 13.0
575V/60 23.7 23.7 23.7 23.7 132 132 132 132 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 56.6 56.6 56.6 56.6 340 340 340 340 4 7.8 31.7
230V/60 55.8 55.8 55.8 55.8 340 340 340 340 4 7.8 35.6
380V/60 34.0 34.0 34.0 34.0 196 196 196 196 4 4.1 20.0
065D
460V/60 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 173 173 173 173 4 3.6 17.8
400V/50 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 173 173 173 173 4 3.6 17.8
575V/60 23.7 23.7 23.7 23.7 132 132 132 132 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 56.6 72.4 56.6 72.4 340 538 340 538 4 7.8 31.7
230V/60 55.8 72.4 55.8 72.4 340 538 340 538 4 7.8 35.6
380V/60 34.0 38.2 34.0 38.2 196 290 196 290 4 4.1 20.0
070D
460V/60 26.9 30.8 26.9 30.8 173 229 173 229 4 3.6 17.8
400V/50 26.9 30.8 26.9 30.8 173 229 173 229 4 3.6 17.8
575V/60 23.7 25.2 23.7 25.2 132 180 132 180 4 3.0 14.0
208V/60 72.4 72.4 72.4 72.4 538 538 538 538 6 7.8 31.7
230V/60 72.4 72.4 72.4 72.4 538 538 538 538 6 7.8 35.6
380V/60 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 290 290 290 290 6 4.1 20.0
075D
460V/60 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 229 229 229 229 6 3.6 17.8
400V/50 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 229 229 229 229 6 3.6 17.8
575V/60 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 180 180 180 180 6 3.0 14.0
208V/60 72.4 72.4 89.1 89.1 538 538 605 605 6 7.8 31.7
230V/60 72.4 72.4 89.1 89.1 538 538 605 605 6 7.8 35.6
380V/60 38.2 38.2 51.9 51.9 290 290 380 380 6 4.1 20.0
080D
460V/60 30.8 30.8 39.0 39.0 229 229 320 320 6 3.6 17.8
400V/50 30.8 30.8 39.0 39.0 229 229 320 320 6 3.6 17.8
575V/60 25.2 25.2 34.7 34.7 180 180 250 250 6 3.0 14.0
208V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 6 7.8 31.7
230V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 6 7.8 35.6
380V/60 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 380 380 380 380 6 4.1 20.0
090D
460V/60 39.0 39.0 39.0 39.0 320 320 320 320 6 3.6 17.8
400V/50 39.0 39.0 39.0 39.0 320 320 320 320 6 3.6 17.8
575V/60 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 250 250 250 250 6 3.0 14.0
208V/60 115.5 89.1 89.1 115.5 599 605 605 599 6 7.8 31.7
230V/60 115.5 89.1 89.1 115.5 599 605 605 599 6 7.8 35.6
380V/60 69.2 51.9 51.9 69.2 358 380 380 358 6 4.1 20.0
100D
460V/60 54.5 39.0 39.0 54.5 310 320 320 310 6 3.6 17.8
400V/50 54.5 39.0 39.0 54.5 310 320 320 310 6 3.6 17.8
575V/60 49.4 34.7 34.7 49.4 239 250 250 239 6 3.0 14.0
62 IM 1165
Table 40: Unit Amp Draw, 50 & 60 Hz continued
#1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 #1 #3 #5 #2 #4 #6 Qty FLA (ea) LRA (ea)
208V/60 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 538 538 538 538 538 538 8 7.8 31.7
230V/60 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 74.5 538 538 538 538 538 538 8 7.8 35.6
380V/60 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 290 290 290 290 290 290 8 4.1 20.0
110D
460V/60 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 229 229 229 229 229 229 8 3.6 17.8
400V/50 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 229 229 229 229 229 229 8 3.6 17.8
575V/60 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 25.2 180 180 180 180 180 180 8 3.0 14.0
208V/60 74.5 74.5 74.5 89.1 89.1 89.1 538 538 538 605 605 605 8 7.8 31.7
230V/60 74.5 74.5 74.5 89.1 89.1 89.1 538 538 538 605 605 605 8 7.8 35.6
380V/60 38.2 38.2 38.2 51.9 51.9 51.9 290 290 290 380 380 380 8 4.1 20.0
125D
460V/60 30.8 30.8 30.8 44.5 44.5 44.5 229 229 229 320 320 320 8 3.6 17.8
400V/50 30.8 30.8 30.8 44.5 44.5 44.5 229 229 229 320 320 320 8 3.6 17.8
575V/60 25.2 25.2 25.2 34.7 34.7 34.7 180 180 180 250 250 250 8 3.0 14.0
208V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 605 605 8 7.8 31.7
230V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 605 605 8 7.8 35.6
380V/60 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 380 380 380 380 380 380 8 4.1 20.0
130D
460V/60 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 320 320 320 320 320 320 8 3.6 17.8
400V/50 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 320 320 320 320 320 320 8 3.6 17.8
575V/60 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 250 250 250 250 250 250 8 3.0 14.0
208V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 605 605 10 7.8 31.7
230V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 89.1 605 605 605 605 605 605 10 7.8 35.6
380V/60 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 51.9 380 380 380 380 380 380 10 4.1 20.0
140D
460V/60 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 320 320 320 320 320 320 10 3.6 17.8
400V/50 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 320 320 320 320 320 320 10 3.6 17.8
575V/60 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7 250 250 250 250 250 250 10 3.0 14.0
208V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 115.5 115.5 115.5 605 605 605 599 599 599 10 7.8 31.7
230V/60 89.1 89.1 89.1 115.5 115.5 115.5 605 605 605 599 599 599 10 7.8 35.6
380V/60 51.9 51.9 51.9 69.2 69.2 69.2 380 380 380 358 358 358 10 4.1 20.0
160D
460V/60 44.5 44.5 44.5 54.5 54.5 54.5 320 320 320 310 310 310 10 3.6 17.8
400V/50 44.5 44.5 44.5 54.5 54.5 54.5 320 320 320 310 310 310 10 3.6 17.8
575V/60 34.7 34.7 34.7 49.4 49.4 49.4 250 250 250 239 239 239 10 3.0 14.0
208V/60 127.5 127.5 128 127.5 127.5 127.5 599 599 599 599 599 599 10 7.8 31.7
230V/60 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 599 599 599 599 599 599 10 7.8 35.6
380V/60 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 358 358 358 358 358 358 10 4.1 20.0
180D
460V/60 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 310 310 310 310 310 310 10 3.6 17.8
400V/50 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 310 310 310 310 310 310 10 3.6 17.8
575V/60 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 239 239 239 239 239 239 10 3.0 14.0
208V/60 127.5 127.5 128 127.5 127.5 127.5 599 599 599 599 599 599 12 7.8 31.7
230V/60 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 115.5 599 599 599 599 599 599 12 7.8 35.6
380V/60 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 69.2 358 358 358 358 358 358 12 4.1 20.0
190D
460V/60 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 310 310 310 310 310 310 12 3.6 17.8
400V/50 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 57.2 310 310 310 310 310 310 12 3.6 17.8
575V/60 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 49.4 239 239 239 239 239 239 12 3.0 14.0
IM 1165 63
Table 41: Electrical Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz)
Pow er Supply Fuse / Circuit Breaker
Model Volts/Phase MCA Field Wire Field Hub. Size
Qty Wire GA Qty Size (in.) Recom . Max.
208V/60 149 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
230V/60 149 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
380V/60 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 100 100
025D
460V/60 74 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 80 80
400V/50 74 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 80 80
575V/60 64 3 6 AWG 1 0.8 70 70
208V/60 158 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
230V/60 152 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
380V/60 98 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 110 110
030D
460V/60 83 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 90 90
400V/50 83 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 90 90
575V/60 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 80 80
208V/60 169 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 200 200
230V/60 165 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 200 200
380V/60 109 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
035D
460V/60 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 100 100
400V/50 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 100 100
575V/60 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 80 80
208V/60 178 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 200 200
230V/60 177 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 200 200
380V/60 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
040D
460V/60 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 100 100
400V/50 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 100 100
575V/60 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 80 80
208V/60 228 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
230V/60 228 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
380V/60 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
045D
460V/60 92 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 110 110
400V/50 92 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 110 110
575V/60 77 3 4 AWG 1 1.0 90 90
208V/60 248 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 300 300
230V/60 248 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 300 300
380V/60 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 150 150
050D
460V/60 110 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
400V/50 110 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
575V/60 97 3 3 AWG 1 1.0 110 110
208V/60 257 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
230V/60 255 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 300 300
380V/60 147 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
055D
460V/60 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
400V/50 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
575V/60 106 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
64 IM 1165
Table 42: Electrical Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz) continued
Pow er Supply Fuse / Circuit Breaker
Model Volts/Phase MCA Field Wire Field Hub. Size
208V/60 264 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
230V/60 261 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
380V/60 161 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
060D
460V/60 126 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 150 150
400V/50 126 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 150 150
575V/60 113 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
208V/60 272 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
230V/60 269 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
380V/60 161 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
065D
460V/60 129 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 150 150
400V/50 129 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 150 150
575V/60 113 3 2 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
208V/60 308 3 350 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
230V/60 306 3 350 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
380V/60 171 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 200 200
070D
460V/60 138 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 150 150
400V/50 138 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 150 150
575V/60 117 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 125 125
208V/60 355 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
230V/60 355 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
380V/60 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 225 225
075D
460V/60 153 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
400V/50 153 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
575V/60 126 3 1 AWG 1 1.3 150 150
208V/60 393 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
230V/60 393 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
380V/60 218 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
080D
460V/60 171 3 2/0 AWG 1 2.0 200 200
400V/50 171 3 2/0 AWG 1 2.0 200 200
575V/60 147 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.5 175 175
208V/60 426 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.0 500 500
230V/60 426 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.0 500 500
380V/60 246 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 250 250
090D
460V/60 188 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 225 225
400V/50 188 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 225 225
575V/60 166 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.5 200 200
208V/60 485 6 250 MCM 2 2.0 600 600
230V/60 485 6 250 MCM 2 2.0 600 600
380V/60 285 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
100D
460V/60 223 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
400V/50 223 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
575V/60 199 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 225 225
IM 1165 65
Table 43: Electrical Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz) continued
Pow er Supply Fus e / Circuit Breake r
Model Volts/Phas e MCA Field Wire Field Hub. Size
208V/60 528 6 300 MCM 2 2.5 600 600
230V/60 528 6 300 MCM 2 2.5 600 600
380V/60 272 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
110D
460V/60 221 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
400V/50 222 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 250 250
575V/60 182 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.0 200 200
208V/60 576 6 350 MCM 2 2.5 600 600
230V/60 576 6 350 MCM 2 2.5 600 600
380V/60 317 3 400 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
125D
460V/60 266 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
400V/50 266 3 300 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
575V/60 213 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.0 225 225
208V/60 620 6 350 MCM 2 2.5 700 700
230V/60 620 6 350 MCM 2 2.5 700 700
380V/60 358 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
130D
460V/60 307 3 350 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
400V/50 307 3 350 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
575V/60 241 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 250 250
208V/60 635 6 400 MCM 2 2.5 700 700
230V/60 635 6 400 MCM 2 2.5 700 700
380V/60 366 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
140D
460V/60 315 3 400 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
400V/50 315 3 400 MCM 1 2.5 350 350
575V/60 247 3 250 MCM 1 2.0 250 250
208V/60 721 12 4/0 AWG 2 3.0 800 800
230V/60 721 12 4/0 AWG 2 3.0 800 800
380V/60 422 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.0 450 450
160D
460V/60 347 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
400V/50 347 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 400 400
575V/60 295 3 350 MCM 1 2.5 300 300
208V/60 875 12 300 MCM 2 3.5 1000 1000
230V/60 800 12 250 MCM 2 3.0 800 800
380V/60 474 6 250 MCM 2 2.0 500 500
180D
460V/60 394 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
400V/50 394 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
575V/60 339 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 350 350
208V/60 891 12 300 MCM 2 3.5 1000 1000
230V/60 816 12 250 MCM 2 3.0 800 800
380V/60 482 6 250 MCM 2 2.0 500 500
190D
460V/60 401 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
400V/50 401 6 250 MCM 1 3.0 450 450
575V/60 345 6 4/0 AWG 1 3.0 350 350
66 IM 1165
Table 44: Electrical Data - Mutli-point (50/60 Hz)
Circuit #1 Circuit #2
Volts/
AGZ Field Wire Field Hub. Fuse Size Field Wire Field Hub. Fuse Size
Phase MCA MCA
Qty Wire GA Qty Size Rec. Max. Qty Wire GA Qty Size Rec. Max.
208V/60 78 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 78 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100
230V/60 78 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 78 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100
380V/60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
025D
460V/60 39 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50 39 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50
400V/50 39 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50 39 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50
575V/60 34 3 10 AWG 1 0.50 45 45 34 3 10 AWG 1 0.50 45 45
208V/60 83 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 83 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
230V/60 80 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 80 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100
380V/60 52 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70 52 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70
030D
460V/60 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
400V/50 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
575V/60 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45
208V/60 83 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
230V/60 80 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 93 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
380V/60 52 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
035D
460V/60 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
400V/50 44 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
575V/60 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45
208V/60 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
230V/60 93 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 93 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
380V/60 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
040D
460V/60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
400V/50 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 46 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
575V/60 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45 36 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 45 45
208V/60 120 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 120 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
230V/60 120 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 120 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
380V/60 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
045D
460V/60 49 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 49 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
400V/50 49 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60 49 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 60 60
575V/60 40 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50 40 3 8 AWG 1 0.50 50 50
208V/60 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
230V/60 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
380V/60 69 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 69 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
050D
460V/60 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
400V/50 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
575V/60 51 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70 51 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70
208V/60 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 139 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
230V/60 131 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 138 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
380V/60 69 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
055D
460V/60 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
400V/50 58 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
575V/60 51 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 70 70 60 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
IM 1165 67
Table 45: Electrical Data - Mutli-point (50/60 Hz) continued
Volts/
Phase MCA MCA
208V/60 139 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 139 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
230V/60 138 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 138 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
380V/60 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
060D
460V/60 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
400V/50 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 67 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
575V/60 60 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 60 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
208V/60 143 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 143 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
230V/60 142 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 142 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
380V/60 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 85 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
065D
460V/60 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
400V/50 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 68 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
575V/60 60 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 60 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
208V/60 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 225 225 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 225 225
230V/60 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 225 225 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 225 225
380V/60 90 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 90 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
070D
460V/60 73 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 73 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100
400V/50 73 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100 73 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 100 100
575V/60 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80 62 3 6 AWG 1 0.75 80 80
208V/60 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
230V/60 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
380V/60 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
075D
460V/60 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
400V/50 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
575V/60 66 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 66 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90
208V/60 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300
230V/60 187 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300
380V/60 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 130 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 175 175
080D
460V/60 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.25 125 125
400V/50 81 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.25 125 125
575V/60 66 3 4 AWG 1 1.00 90 90 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
208V/60 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300
230V/60 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300 224 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 300 300
380V/60 130 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 175 175 130 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 175 175
090D
460V/60 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
400V/50 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125 99 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 125 125
575V/60 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 88 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
208V/60 257 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 350 350 257 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 350 350
230V/60 257 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 350 350 257 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 350 350
380V/60 151 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 151 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
100D
460V/60 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
400V/50 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 118 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
575V/60 106 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 106 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
68 IM 1165
Table 46: Electrical Data - Mutli-point (50/60 Hz) continued
Volts/
Phase MCA MCA
208V/60 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300
230V/60 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300
380V/60 141 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 141 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175
110D
460V/60 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125
400V/50 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125
575V/60 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110
208V/60 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
230V/60 274 3 300 MCM 1 2.50 300 300 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
380V/60 141 3 1/0 AWG 1 1.50 175 175 186 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
125D
460V/60 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
400V/50 115 3 2 AWG 1 1.25 125 125 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
575V/60 94 3 3 AWG 1 1.00 110 110 125 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
208V/60 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
230V/60 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 321 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
380V/60 186 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225 186 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
130D
460V/60 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
400V/50 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 159 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
575V/60 125 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 125 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
208V/60 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
230V/60 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400
380V/60 190 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225 190 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
140D
460V/60 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
400V/50 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200
575V/60 128 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 128 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150
208V/60 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 415 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500
230V/60 329 3 400 MCM 1 2.50 400 400 415 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500
380V/60 190 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225 246 3 250 MCM 1 2.00 300 300
160D
460V/60 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 196 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
400V/50 163 3 2/0 AWG 1 1.50 200 200 196 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
575V/60 128 3 1 AWG 1 1.25 150 150 176 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
208V/60 454 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500 454 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500
230V/60 415 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500 415 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500
380V/60 246 3 250 MCM 1 2.00 300 300 246 3 250 MCM 1 2.00 300 300
180D
460V/60 204 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 204 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
400V/50 204 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 204 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
575V/60 176 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225 176 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
208V/60 462 6 250 MCM 2 2.00 500 500 462 6 250 MCM 2 2.00 500 500
230V/60 423 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500 423 6 4/0 AWG 2 2.00 500 500
380V/60 250 3 250 MCM 1 2.00 300 300 250 3 250 MCM 1 2.00 300 300
190D
460V/60 208 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 208 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
400V/50 208 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250 208 3 4/0 AWG 1 2.00 250 250
575V/60 179 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225 179 3 3/0 AWG 1 2.00 225 225
IM 1165 69
Table 47: Wiring Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz) Standard and HSCCR Panels
Pow er Block Disconnect*
Model Volts/Phase
Size Lug Range Size Lug Range
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
025D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
030D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
035D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
040D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
045D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 100A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
050D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
055D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
Notes: * On HSCCR unit: 400A & (1) 600-#4
70 IM 1165
Table 48: Wiring Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz) continued
Model Volts/Phase
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
060D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
065D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
070D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 400A (2) 250 - #1 **
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 400A (2) 250 - #1 **
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
075D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 150A * (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
080D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
090D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
100D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
** On HSCCR unit: (2) 350 - #2/0
IM 1165 71
Table 49: Wiring Data - Single Point (50/60 Hz) continued
Model Volts/Phase
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
110D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
125D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
130D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A * (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
140D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
208V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 800A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
160D
460V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
400V/50 760A (2) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
208V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 1000A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 1000A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
180D
460V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
400V/50 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
208V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 1000A (4) 500 - 3/0
230V/60 1000A (4) 600 - #2 1000A (4) 500 - 3/0
380V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
190D
460V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
400V/50 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
** On HSCCR unit: (2) 350 - #2/0
72 IM 1165
Table 50: Wiring Data - Multi-point (50/60 Hz)
Volts/
Model Power Block [2] Disconnect Switch [2] Power Block [2] Disconnect Switch [2]
Phase
Size Lug Range Size Lug Range Size Lug Range Size Lug Range
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
025D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
030D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
035D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
040D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
045D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
050D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
055D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
Note [1] - On HSCCR Unit = 400A {(1) 600 - #1}
Note [2] - Power Block and Disconnect Switch sizes are the minimum.
Larger sizes may beused, however the lug range must be the same.
IM 1165 73
Table 51: Wiring Data - Multi-point (50/60 Hz) continued
Volts/
Phase
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
060D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
065D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
070D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
075D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
080D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
090D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 100A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
100D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
74 IM 1165
Table 52: Wiring Data - Multi-point (50/60 Hz) continued
Volts/
Phase
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
110D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
125D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
130D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
140D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14
208V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
160D
460V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 175A (1) 2/0 - #14 150A [1] (1) 1/0 - #14 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
180D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
208V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
230V/60 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0 760A (2) 500 - #4 600A (2) 350 - 2/0
380V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1 380A (1) 500 - #4 400A (1) 600 - #1
190D
460V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
400V/50 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
575V/60 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4 380A (1) 500 - #4 250A [1] (1) 4/0 - #4
IM 1165 75
Start-up and Shut-down Procedures and Component Operation
Pre Start-up 3 Put System Switch (S1) to the Emergency Stop position.
Inspected the chiller to ensure no components became loose or 4 Put both circuit #1 & #2 switches to the Pumpdown and
damaged during shipping or installation including leak test and Stop position.
wiring check. 5 Apply power to the unit. The panel Alarm Light will stay
on until S1 is closed. Ignore the Alarm Light for the
Pre-Startup Water Piping Checkout check out period. If you have the optional Alarm Bell,
1 Check the pump operation and vent all air from the you may wish to disconnect it.
system. 6 Check at the power block or disconnect for the proper
2 Circulate evaporator water, checking for proper system voltage and proper voltage between phases. Check
pressure and evaporator pressure drop. Compare the power for proper phasing using a phase sequence meter
pressure drop to the evaporator water pressure drop before starting unit.
curve. 7 Check for 120 Vac at the optional control transformer
3 Flush System and clean all water strainers before placing and at TB-2 terminal #1 and the neutral block (NB).
the chiller into service. 8 Check between TB-2 terminal #7 and NB for 120 Vac
4 Check water treatment and proper glycol percent. supply for transformer #2.
9 Check between TB-2 terminal #2 and NB for 120 Vac
Pre-Startup Refrigerant Piping Checkout
control voltage. This supplies the compressor crank case
1 Check all exposed brazed joints for evidence of leaks. heaters.
Joints may have been damaged during shipping or when
the unit was installed. 10 Check between TB-3 terminal #17 and #27 for 24 Vac
control voltage.
2 Check that all refrigerant valves are either opened or
closed as required for proper operation of the chiller. Start-Up
3 A thorough leak test must be done using an approved Refer to the MicroTech III Controller information in the
electronic leak detector. Check all valve stem packing for operating manual OMM 1087 to become familiar with unit
leaks. Replace all refrigerant valve caps and tighten. operation before starting the chiller.
4 Check all refrigerant lines to insure that they will not There should be adequate building load (at least 50 percent of
vibrate against each other or against other chiller the unit full load capacity) to properly check the operation of
components and are properly supported. the chiller refrigerant circuits.
5 Check all connections and all refrigerant threaded
Be prepared to record all operating parameters required by the
connectors.
"Compressorized Equipment Warranty Form". Return this
6 Look for any signs of refrigerant leaks around the information within 10 working days to Daikin as instructed
condenser coils and for damage during shipping or on the form to obtain full warranty benefits.
installation.
7 Connect refrigerant service gauges to each refrigerant Start-Up Steps
circuit before starting unit. • Verify chilled water flow.
• Verify remote start / stop or time clock (if installed) has
Pre-Startup Electrical Check Out requested the chiller to start.
WARNING • Set the chilled water setpoint to the required temperature.
(The system water temperature must be greater than the total
Electrical power must be applied to the compressor crankcase
heaters 8 hours before starting unit to eliminate refrigerant of the leaving water temperature setpoint plus one-half the
from the oil. control band plus the start-up delta-T before the MicroTech
III controller will stage on cooling.)
1 Open all electrical disconnects and check all power
wiring connections. Start at the power block and check • Set the Evap Delta T based on a percent of unit nominal flow
all connections through all components to and including indicated in Table 12 and the Start Delta T as a starting
the compressor terminals. These should be checked point. Delta-T=Tons x 24 / gpm
again after 3 months of operation and at least yearly • Check the controller setpoints to be sure that factory defaults
thereafter. are appropriate.
2 Check all control wiring by pulling on the wire at the • Put both pumpdown switches (PS1 and PS2) to the ON
spade connections and tighten all screw connections. position.
Check plug-in relays for proper seating and to insure
• Put system switch (S1) to ON position
retaining clips are installed.
76 IM 1165
Table 53: Pumpdown and System Switch Positions or is filled with suitable glycol). Tag all opened electrical
Switch Position disconnect switches to warn against start-up before the
Switch refrigerant valves are in the correct operating position.
ON OFF
To start the chiller after an extended shutdown, follow
Circuits will Circuit will go
PS1, PS2, the prestart-up and start-up instructions.
operate in the through the normal
Pumpdown
normal, pumpdown cycle
Switches
automatic mode and shut off. Component Operation
Unit will shut off
Unit will operate
S1, System immediately without Hot Gas Bypass (Optional)
in the normal
Switch pumping down This option allows the system to operate at lower loads without
automatic mode
(emergency stop) excessive on/off compressor cycling. The hot gas bypass
Post Start-up option is required to be on both refrigerant circuits because of
the lead / lag feature of the controller.
After the chiller has been operating for a period of time and
has become stable, check the following: This option allows passage of discharge gas into the
evaporator inlet (between the TX valve and the evaporator)
• Compressor oil level. (Some scroll compressors do not have
which generates a false load to supplement the actual chilled
oil sight glasses.)
water or air handler load.
• Refrigerant sight glass for flashing
Note: The hot gas bypass valve will not generate a 100% false
• Rotation of condenser fans load.
• Complete the "Compressorized Equipment Warranty Form"
The pressure regulating valve is factory set to begin opening at
Shutdown 102 psig with R-410a and can be changed by changing the
pressure setting. The adjustment range is 75 to 150 psig. To
Temporary Shutdown raise the pressure setting, remove the cap on the bulb and turn
1 Put both circuit switches to the OFF position the adjustment screw clockwise. To lower the setting, turn the
(Pumpdown and Stop). screw counterclockwise. Do not force the adjustment beyond
the range it is designed for, as this will damage the adjustment
2 After compressors have stopped, put System Switch (S1)
assembly. The regulating valve opening point can be
to OFF (emergency stop).
determined by slowly reducing the system load while
3 Turn off chilled water pump. Chilled water pump to observing the suction pressure. When the bypass valve starts to
operate while compressors are pumping down. open, the refrigerant line on the evaporator side of the valve
4 To start the chiller after a temporary shutdown, follow will begin to feel warm to the touch.
the start-up instructions. A solenoid valve is located ahead of the bypass valve and is
controlled by the MicroTech III controller. It is active when the
Extended Shutdown
first stage of cooling on a circuit is active.
1 Front seat both condenser liquid line service valves.
2 Put both circuit switches to the OFF position WARNING
(Pumpdown and Stop position). The hot gas line may become hot enough to cause injury. Be
3 After the compressors have stopped, put System Switch careful during valve checkout.
(S1) to the OFF position (emergency stop).
4 Front seat both refrigerant circuit discharge valves (if VFD Low Ambient Control (Optional)
applicable). The optional VFD fan control is used for unit operation below
5 If chilled water system is not drained, maintain power to 35 F (2 C) down to a minimum of -10 F (-23.3 C). The control
the evaporator heater to prevent freezing. Maintain heat looks at the saturated discharge temperature and varies
tracing on the chilled water lines. (pressure) at the "target" temperature. This temperature is
established as an input to a setpoint screen labeled "Sat
6 Drain evaporator and water piping to prevent freezing. Condenser Temp Target".
7 If electrical power to the unit is on, the compressor
crankcase heaters will keep the liquid refrigerant out of Filter-Driers
the compressor oil. This will minimize start-up time Each refrigerant circuit is furnished with a replaceable core
when putting the unit back into service. The evaporator type filter-drier. The core assembly of the replaceable core
heater will be able to function. drier consists of a filter core held tightly in the shell in a
8 If electrical power is off, make provisions to power the
evaporator heater (if chilled water system is not drained
IM 1165 77
manner that allows full flow without bypass. Pressure drop Crankcase Heaters
across the filter drier must not exceed the following values. The scroll compressors are equipped with externally mounted
PERCENT CIRCUIT band heaters located at the oil sump level. The function of the
DROP ACROSS (KPA)
LOADING (%) heater is to keep the temperature in the crankcase high enough
100% 10 (69) to prevent refrigerant from migrating to the crankcase and
75% 8 (55.2)
50% 5 (34.5) condensing in the oil during off-cycle.
25% 4 (27.6)
Power must be supplied to the heaters 8 hours before starting
A condenser liquid line service valve is provided for isolating the compressors.
the charge in the condenser, but also serves as the point from
which the liquid line can be pumped out. With the line free of Evaporator
refrigerant, the filter-drier core(s) can be easily replaced. On models AGZ-025D through 130D, the evaporator is a
compact, high efficiency, dual circuit, brazed plate-to-plate
System Adjustment
type heat exchanger consisting of parallel stainless steel plates.
To maintain peak performance at full load operation, the The evaporator is protected with an electric resistance heater
system superheat and liquid subcooling may require and insulated with 3/4" (19mm) thick closed-cell polyurethane
adjustment. Read the following subsections closely to insulation. This combination provides freeze protection down
determine if adjustment is required. to -20°F (-29°C) ambient air temperature. The water side
working pressure of the brazed plate type of evaporator is 653
Liquid Line Sight Glass psig (4502 kPa). Evaporators are designed and constructed
The color of the moisture indicator is an indication of the according to, and listed by, Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
dryness of the system and is extremely important when the
On models AGZ-140D through -190D, the evaporator is a
system has been serviced. Immediately after the system has
direct-expansion, shell-and-U-tube type with water flowing in
been opened for service, the element may indicate a wet
the baffled shell side, and refrigerant flowing through the
condition. It is recommended that the equipment operate for
tubes. The evaporator has an insertion heater and is insulated
approximately 12 hours to allow the system to reach
with 3/4" (19 mm) thick vinyl nitrate polymer sheet insulation,
equilibrium before deciding if the system requires a change of
protecting against water freeze-up at ambient air temperatures
drier cores.
to -20° F ( 29° C). An water thermostat controls the heater
Bubbles in the sight glass at constant full load indicates a cable. The fitted and glued-in-place insulation has a K factor
shortage of refrigerant, a plugged filter-drier, or a restriction in of 0.28 Btu in/hr ft2 ºF at 75°F. The water side working
the liquid line. However, it is not unusual to see bubbles in the pressure of the shell-and-tube type of evaporator is 152 psig
sight glass during changing load conditions. (1048 kPa). Each evaporator is designed, constructed,
inspected, and stamped according to the requirements of the
Expansion Valve ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Double thickness
The expansion valve's function is to keep the evaporator insulation is available as an option.
supplied with the proper amount of refrigerant to satisfy the
load conditions. Phase Voltage Monitor (Optional)
Factory settings are as follows:
Before adjusting superheat, check that unit charge is correct
and liquid line sight glass is full with no bubbles and that the • Trip Delay Time: 2 seconds.
circuit is operating under stable, full load conditions. • Voltage Setting: set at nameplate voltage.
The suction superheat for the suction leaving the evaporator is • Restart Delay Time: 60 seconds.
set at the factory for 10 to 12 degrees F at full load. To have
full rated unit performance, the superheat must be about 8
degrees F at 95°F outdoor ambient temperature.
78 IM 1165
Wind Baffles and Hail Guards
Wind Baffles and Hail Guards
Factory or field installed louvers are available for protection Figure 46: Installation Sequence
against fin damage from hail. Protection against negative Step 1 - Rib Attachment
operating effects from wind as well as hail protection can be
RIB FLANG ES O N THE END
achieved from Daikin box-type enclosures described below. MUST PO INT TO CENTER
OF COIL TO HAVE A F INISHED
LOO K. INTERIOR R IB F LANG ES
CAN POINT IN ANY DIR ECT ION.
Wind Baffles/Hail Guards are a field-installed option that is UNIT VERTICAL CO IL
used to stabilize unit operation in high wind areas and to assist

in operation at low ambient temperatures.
Figure 46 is a sketch of a typical panel assembly on an AGZ
unit. The actual number of panels and parts will vary by model
size, being one set per fan, on each side (see Physical Data ATTACH ALL RIBS TO
COIL VERTICAL CHANNELS.
tables (beginning on page 44 for the number of fans). The parts
are shown in the Table 54 and referenced by balloon numbers. Step 2 - Front Panel Attachment
Table 54: Packing List PLACE FRO NT "A" AND
FASTEN TO BOT H SIDES
E
Part Bubble UNIT VE RTIC AL CO IL
Description
Number Number D
Vertical Support Rib 074758501 1 C
Top Cover 330409401 2 B

2 PLACE FR ONT "B" BY LAPPING
A OVER "A" AND REPEAT
Front Panel 330409501 3 ATTACHMENT PR OCEDU RE.
1 3
¼ - 20 x ½” Screw (Place in Poly Bag) 046093807
Figure 45: Components

Step 3 - Top Panel Attachment
E
ATTACH TOP "A" AT HORIZONTAL COIL CHANNEL FIRST.
THIS WILL SQUARE THE PANEL.
OVERLAP THE FRONT PANEL FLANGE. D
UNIT VERTICAL COIL C
ATTACH LEFT SIDE SECOND.

LAP PANEL "B" OVER PANEL "A"
AND REPEAT ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE.
Top Panel, Install

Last
Front Panel, Install Second
Rib, Install
IM 1165 79
Warranty Registration Form (Scroll)
Job Name: Daikin S.O. No.:
Installation Address:
City/State/Zip:
Purchasing Contractor:
City/State/Zip:
Unit Model No. Serial No.:
Compressor #1 Serial No.: Compre ssor #2 Serial No.:
I. PRE START-UP PROCEDURE - refer to attached documentation.
II. PRE START-UP CHECKLIST YES NO

A. Is any shipping damage visible?.............................................................................................................................................
B. Is unit installed level?.............................................................................................................................................................
C. Is unit positioned to provide adequate free area for service and operation? ...........................................................................
D. Are fans properly aligned and turn freely? .............................................................................................................................
E. Has thermostat bulb been properly installed in the well? .......................................................................................................
F. Does electrical service correspond to unit nameplate? ...........................................................................................................
Volts __ Hertz Phase
G. Has unit been adequately grounded? ......................................................................................................................................
H. Has an adequate fused disconnect and fuses been installed? ..................................................................................................
Fuse Amp Rating ____________
I. Are all electrical power connections tight?.............................................................................................................................
J. Have compressor crankcase heaters been operating for 24 hours prior to start-up? ...............................................................
K. Are setscrews on all pulleys, bearings and fans tight?............................................................................................................
L. Are all service and liquid line valves open? ...........................................................................................................................
M. Have all shipping hold down plates been removed?...............................................................................................................
N. Does all field wiring conform to unit electrical diagram?.......................................................................................................
O. Has a flow switch been installed per the IM bulletin?............................................................................................................
P. Does chiller and condenser water piping conformto the IM Bulletin?...................................................................................
Q. Is wind impingement against the air cooled condenser a consideration?................................................................................
R. Description of unit location with respect to building structures; i.e., buildings, fences, walls, overhangs, other?
Description: _______________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
80 Form # SF-99007 • Part #: 041541502-D

III. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

YES NO
A. Has all field piping been leak tested at 100 psig (690 kPa)?...................................................................................................
B. Has system been properly evacuated and charged?................................................................................................................
C. Refrigerant R-___________ Circuit 1 __________ lbs. (kg) Circuit 2 _____________ lbs. (kg)
D. Does piping to unit appear to be adequately sized and installed according to the IM bulletin?..............................................
E. Is a liquid line filter-drier installed in each circuit?................................................................................................................
F. Is level of oil in sightglass visible but not more than 1/2 glass with compressors running?...................................................
G. Is a liquid line solenoid installed in each circuit? ...................................................................................................................
H. Is expansion valve bulb properly installed and insulated?......................................................................................................
IV. DESIGN CONTROLS (From submittal)
A. CHILLER
Water Pressure Drop: _______ psig (kPa) _________ Ft. (kPa) ________ gpm (lps)
Water Temperatures: Entering ________ °F ( °C) Leaving __________ °F ( °C)
B. CONDENSOR
Water Pressure Drop: _______ psig (kPa) ________ Ft. (kPa) ________ gpm (lps)
Water Temperatures: Entering ________ °F ( °C) Leaving __________ °F ( °C)
V. START-UP (Readings Must Be Taken At Full Load) YES NO

A. Does unit start and perform per sequence of operation as stated in the IM bulletin?.....................................................
B. Do condenser fans rotate in the proper direction?..........................................................................................................
MICROTECH STATUS CHECK (Each Reading Must be Verified With Field Provided Instruments Of Known Accuracy)
MicroTech Verification
C. Water Temperatures: Leaving Evaporator.............................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
Entering Evaporator ............................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
Entering Condenser.............................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
Leaving Condenser............................................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
D. Circuit #1Refrigerant Pressures:
Evaporator _________ psig (kPa) ________ F ( °C) ________psig
Minimum Condenser Pressure ________ psig (kPa)
Maximum Condenser Pressure ________ psig (kPa)
E. Circuit #2 Refrigerant Pressures:
Evaporator ________ psig (kPa) ________ °F ( °C) psig
Minimum Condenser Pressure _______ psig (kPa)
Maximum Condenser Pressure _______ psig (kPa)
F. Circuit #1 Refrigerant Temperatures:
Saturated Evaporator Temperature....................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
Suction Line Temperature.................................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
Suction Superheat................................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
Saturated Condenser Temperature ....................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
Condenser Approach ............................................................................ F (°C) F (°C)
Liquid Line Temperature ..................................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
Subcooling ........................................................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
G. Circuit #2 Refrigerant Temperatures:
Saturated Evaporator Temperature....................................................... ________F (°C) F (°C)
Suction Line Temperature.................................................................... ________F (°C) F (°C)
Suction Superheat................................................................................. ________F (°C) F (°C)
Saturated Condenser Temperature ....................................................... ________F (°C) F (°C)
Condenser Approach ............................................................................ ________F (°C) F (°C)
Liquid Line Temperature ..................................................................... ________F (°C) F (°C)
Subcooling ........................................................................................... ________F (°C) F (°C)
H. Outdoor Air Temperature ............................................................................................................ ________F (°C) F (°C)
Form # SF-99007 • Part #: 041541502-D 81

I. Does the system contain glycol? .....................................................................................................................................

Percentage by weight __________ or by volume __________
J. If the chilled water system includes glycol, have the freezestats been adjusted lower to meet actual job requirements?
Note: See installation bulletin for low temperature or ice bank applications.
K. Waterside Pressure Drop:

Chiller: psig (kPa) Ft. (kPa) gpm (lps)
Condenser: psig (kPa) Ft. (kPa) gpm (lps)
L. System Oil Pressure:
Compressor #1 _______ psig (kPa) Compressor #3 ________ psig (kPa) Compressor #5 ________ psig (kPa)
Compressor #2 _______ psig (kPa) Compressor #4 ________ psig (kPa) Compressor #6 ________ psig (kPa)
M. Unit Voltage Across Each Phase: V V V
N. Unit Current Per Phase: amps amps amps
O. Compressor Current Per Phase:
Compressor #1: Amps Amps Amps
Compressor#4: Amps Amps Amps
VI. CONTROL CHECK AND SETPOINT VERIFICATION / STANDARD UNIT SETPOINT

MICROTECH SETPOINTS MICROTECH STANDARD
A. Leaving Evaporator ........... ............................................................................................................. ________F (°C) _______ F (°C)
B. Reset Leaving .................... ............................................................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
C. Reset Signal....................... ............................................................................................................. ___________ma
D. Reset Option ____________
E. Maximum Chilled Water Reset ....................................................................................................... F (°C) F (°C)
F. Return Setpoint.................. ............................................................................................................. F (°C)
G. Maximum Pulldown .......... ............................................................................................................. F (°C)
H. Control Band ..................... ............................................................................................................. F (°C) F (°C)
I. Interstage Delay................. ............................................................................................................. sec. ________ sec.
J. Start-to-Start Delay............ ............................................................................................................. min.
K. Stop-to-Stop Delay ............ ............................................................................................................. ________min.
L. Minimum Lift Pressure...... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa)
M. Deadband........................... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa)
N. Stage Up Error ................... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa)
O. Stage Down Error .............. ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa)
ALARM SETPOINTS MUST BE VERIFIED WITH INSTRUMENTS OF KNOWN ACCURACY

P. Low Pressure Cut-In ........ ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa) ____ psig (kPa)
Q. Low Pressure Cut-Out...... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa) ____ psig (kPa)
R. Refrigerant Freezestat....... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa) ____ psig (kPa)
S. Chilled Water Freezestat .. ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa) ____ psig (kPa)
T. Freezestat Time Delay...... ............................................................................................................. _________sec. _________sec.
U. High Pressure Cut-Out...... ............................................................................................................. ____ psig (kPa) ____ psig (kPa)
V. Unit Type = _____________________
W. Number of Compressors = __________
X. Number of Stages = _______________
Y. Number of Fan Stages = ___________
Z. IDENT = _______________________
82 Form # SF-99007 • Part #: 041541502-D

VII. FOR HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS ONLY (Must Be Taken At Full Load)
A. Place unit in heat recovery mode.
B. Waterside Pressure Drop: ________ psig (kPa) __________ Ft. (kPa) __________ gpm (lps)
C. Waterside Temperatures: _________ Inlet __________ Outlet
D. Head Pressure: Circuit #1 __________ psig (kPa) Circuit #2 _________ psig (kPa)
E. Suction Pressure: Circuit #1 _________ psig (kPa) Circuit #2 _________ psig (kPa)
F. Compressor Current Per Phase:
Compressor #1 __________ AMPS ___________ AMPS __________ AMPS
VIII. GENERAL
A. Are all control lines secure to prevent excess vibration and wear? ........................................................................................
B. Are all gauges shut off, valve caps and packings tight after startup? .....................................................................................
Performed By: Title:
Company Name: _____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
City/ State/ Zip Code: _________________________________________________________________________________________________
Telephone Number: ______________________________________ Modem Number: _____________________________________
Signature: Date:
Contractor's Signature:
RETURN COMPLETED FORM TO: DAIKIN, WARRANTY DEPARTMENT, PO BOX 2510, STAUNTON, VA 24402
Form # SF-99007 • Part #: 041541502-D 83

84 Form # SF-99007 • Part #: 041541502-D

Daikin Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high priority.
For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.www.DaikinApplied.com.com and
click on training, or call 540-248-9646 to speak to the Training Department.
Warranty
All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited Product
Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Representative for warranty details. Refer to Form 933- 43285Y. To find
your local Daikin Representative, go to www.www.DaikinApplied.com.com.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date product
information, please go to www.www.DaikinApplied.com.com.
Daikin Applied
800.432.1342
www.DaikinApplied.com
© 2013 Daikin Applied • www.DaikinApplied.com • 800-432-1342 03/20/2013

THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Operating & Maintenance Manual OMM 1166-2
Group: Chiller
Part No. OMM1166-2
Effective: June 2014
Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Chiller
AGZ025D – AGZ190D (Rev 0A) 25 to 190 Tons
50 - 60-Hertz, R-410A
Software Version 251699201
© 2014 Daikin Applied

Table of Contents
Unit Problem Alarms .................................. 38
Introduction ........................................3 Unit Warning Alarms .................................. 38
Operating/Standby Limits ............................ 9 Circuit Fault Alarms ................................... 39
Pressure Drop Curves ........................9 Circuit Events ............................................. 41
Minimum Allowable Flow Rates ................. 9 Circuit Warning Alarms .............................. 42
Pressure Drop Curves ................................ 10 Events ............................................... 42
MicroTech III Controller .............13 Unit Events ................................................. 42
Controller Section Table of Contents ......... 13 Circuit Events ............................................. 42
Security ...................................................... 19 Clearing AlarmsError! Bookmark not defined.
Unit Functions ..................................20 Using the Controller........................ 46

Definitions ................................................. 20 Navigating .................................................. 47
Unit Enable ................................................ 21 Menus ......................................................... 49
Unit Mode Selection .................................. 21 Optional Low Ambient Fan VFD .. 62
Unit States.................................................. 22 VFD Interface (HMI) ................................. 63
Power Up Start Delay ................................ 22 Recommended Periodic Inspection ............ 67
Ice Mode Start Delay ................................. 23
Unit Status ................................................. 23 Optional BAS Interface .................. 67
Evaporator Pump Control .......................... 24
LWT Target ................................................ 25 Startup .............................................. 68
Unit Capacity Control ................................ 26 Operation ......................................... 70
Unit Capacity Overrides ............................ 27
Unit Maintenance ............................ 75
Circuit Functions..............................29 Planned Maintenance Schedule .................. 76
Definitions ................................................. 29
Circuit Control Logic ................................. 29 Service .............................................. 77
Pumpdown Procedure ................................ 31 R-410A....................................................... 77
Low Ambient Starts ................................... 31 Refrigerant Charging .................................. 78
Circuit Status ............................................. 31 Evaporator .................................................. 81
Compressor Control ................................... 31
Condenser Fan Control .............................. 32 AGZ-D Troubleshooting Chart ...... 82
EXV Control .............................................. 34 Warranty StatementError! Bookmark not
Liquid Line Solenoid Valve ....................... 35
Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve ................ 35
defined.
Capacity Overrides – Limits of Operation . 35
Alarms ...............................................35
Unit Fault Alarms....................................... 36
Cover picture: AGZ 190D
Our facility is ISO Certified
©2014 Daikin Applied. Illustrations and data cover the Daikin Applied product at the time of publication and we reserve the right to make
changes in design and construction at anytime without notice.
2 AGZ 025D through 190D OMM 1166-2

Introduction
General Description
NOTE: Vintage changes; this manual covers indicators, solenoid valves, and thermal
Revision 0A to the original AGZD version expansion valves.
“00”. The units are very close in appearance
Other features include compressor crankcase
but can be differentiated by their nameplate.
heaters, an evaporator heater for chilled water
Version OO name plate is AGZ……….E10 freeze protection, , automatic compressor lead-
Revision OA nameplate is AGZ………E11 lag to alternate the compressor starting
sequence, and sequenced starting of
Daikin Applied air-cooled global water chillers
compressors.
are complete, self-contained automatic
refrigerating units. Every unit is completely The electrical control center includes all
assembled, factory wired, charged, and tested equipment protection and operating controls
(except remote evaporator option). Each unit necessary for dependable automatic operation.
consists of twin air-cooled condensers with
This manual covers units with Software
integral subcooler sections, two tandem or
Version 251699201 which must be used with
triple scroll compressors, brazed-plate or
firmware version 9.XX.
replaceable tube, dual circuit shell-and-tube
evaporator, and complete refrigerant piping. Installation information is in the current
Liquid line components include manual liquid Installation and Maintenance manual available
line shutoff valves, sight-glass/moisture at www.DaikinApplied.com.
Nomenclature
A G Z - XXX D H
Application
H= Packaged Chiller
Air-Cooled B= Remote Evaporator
Design Vintage
Global
Scroll Compressor Model Size

(Nominal Tons)
Hazard Identification Information

! DANGER
Dangers indicate a hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
! WARNING
Warnings indicate potentially hazardous situations, which can result in property damage, severe
personal injury, or death if not avoided.
! CAUTION
Cautions indicate potentially hazardous situations, which can result in personal injury or equipment
damage if not avoided.
OMM 1166-2 AGZ 025D through 190D 3

Ambient Air Temperature water flow is slow and the minimum and
maximum flow rates for the vessel are not
Limitations exceeded.
Standard/High Ambient Panels The recommended maximum change in water
The maximum operating ambient temperature flow is 10 percent of the change per minute.
for standard units is 104°F (40°C). AGZ-D
When units are operated with flow rates
units for high ambient operation (105°F to
less than nominal (see
125°F maximum) require the addition of the
High Ambient Control Panel Option, which Table 8 on page 11), the “Evap Delta T”
includes the addition of a small fan with a setpoint must be changed proportionally to
filter in the air intake to cool the control panel. match the minimum operating flow rate. The
“Delta T” setting should be increased by the
All units with the optional variable frequency same percentage as the flow reduction is from
drive (VFD) low ambient fan control the nominal rating in order to prevent short
automatically include the High Ambient cycling. This will require reevaluation of
Control Panel Option. Operation of the VFD “Cool LWT”, “Startup Delta T”, and “Stop
generates a quantity of panel heat best Delta T” settings as well
removed by use of a control panel fan.
System Water Volume
Water Flow Limitations Considerations
All chilled water systems need adequate time
The evaporator flow rates and pressure drops to recognize a load change, respond to that
shown on page 11 are for full load design load change and stabilize without undesirable
purposes in order to maintain proper unit short cycling of the compressors or loss of
control. The maximum flow rate and pressure temperature control. In air conditioning
drop are based on a 6 degree temperature drop. systems, the potential for short cycling usually
Avoid higher flow rates with resulting lower exists when the building load falls below the
temperature drops to prevent potential control minimum chiller plant capacity or on close-
problems resulting from very small control coupled systems with very small water
bands and limited start up/shut off temperature volumes.
changes.
Some of the things the designer should
The minimum flow and pressure drop is
consider when looking at water volume are the
dependent on whether constant or variable
minimum cooling load, the minimum chiller
flow is employed in the chilled water system.
plant capacity during the low load period and
See 9 for details. Evaporator flow rates below
the desired cycle time for the compressors.
the minimum values can result in laminar flow
causing freeze-up problems, scaling and poor Assuming that there are no sudden load
control. Flow rates above the maximum values changes and that the chiller plant has
will result in unacceptable pressure drops and reasonable turndown, a rule of thumb of
can cause excessive erosion, potentially “gallons of water volume equal to two to three
leading to failure. times the chilled water gpm flow rate” is often
used.
Variable Speed Pumping
Variable water flow involves changing the A properly designed storage tank should be
water flow through the evaporator as the load added if the system components do not provide
changes. Daikin Applied chillers are designed sufficient water volume.
for this duty provided that the rate of change in

Glycol Solutions
The use of a glycol/water mixture in the evaporator to prevent freezing reduces system capacity and
efficiency, as well as increase pressure drop. The system capacity, required glycol solution flow rate,
and pressure drop with glycol may be calculated using Table 1.
1. Capacity – Multiply the capacity based on water by the Capacity correction factor from Table 2
through Table 5.
2. Flow – Multiply the water evaporator flow by the Flow correction factor from Table 2 through
Table 5 to determine the increased evaporator flow due to glycol.
If the flow is unknown, it can be calculated from the following equation
3. Pressure drop -- Multiply the water pressure drop from page 9 by Pressure Drop correction factor
from Table 2 through Table 5. High concentrations of propylene glycol at low temperatures can
cause unacceptably high pressure drops.
4. Power -- Multiply the water system power by Power correction factor from Table 2 - Table 5.
Test coolant with a clean, accurate glycol solution hydrometer (similar to that found in service
stations) to determine the freezing point. Obtain percent glycol from the freezing point tables below.
It is recommended that a minimum of 25% solution by weight be used for protection against corrosion
or that additional compatible inhibitors be added.
Concentrations above 35 % do not provide any additional burst protection and should be carefully
considered before using.
Table 1, Flow/Tons/Delta-T Relationship

24 × Tons Capacity ( glycol )
Glycol Flow (gpm) × Flow Correction Factor
Delta T
kW Capacity
Glycol Flow (l/s) × Flow Correction Factor
4.18 × Delta − T
! WARNING
Do not use an automotive grade antifreeze. Industrial grade glycols must be used. Automotive
antifreeze contains inhibitors which will cause plating on the copper tubes within the chiller evaporator.
The type and handling of glycol used must be consistent with local codes
Table 2, Ethylene Glycol Factors for Models AGZ 025D to 130D

Freeze Point
% E.G. o o Capacity Power Flow PD
F C
10 26 -3.3 0.998 0.998 1.036 1.097
20 18 -7.8 0.993 0.997 1.060 1.226
30 7 -13.9 0.987 0.995 1.092 1.369
40 -7 -21.7 0.980 0.992 1.132 1.557
50 -28 -33.3 0.973 0.991 1.182 1.791
Table 3, Propylene Glycol Factors for Models AGZ 025D to 130D

Freeze Point
% P.G. o o Capacity Power Flow PD
F C
10 26 -3.3 0.995 0.997 1.016 1.100
20 19 -7.2 0.987 0.995 1.032 1.211
30 9 -12.8 0.978 0.992 1.057 1.380
40 -5 -20.6 0.964 0.987 1.092 1.703
50 -27 -32.8 0.952 0.983 1.140 2.251

Table 4, Ethylene Glycol Factors for Models AGZ 140D to 190D
Freeze Point
% E.G. o o Capacity Power Flow PD
F C
10 26 -3.3 0.994 0.998 1.038 1.101
20 18 -7.8 0.982 0.995 1.063 1.224
30 7 -13.9 0.970 0.992 1.095 1.358
40 -7 -21.7 0.955 0.987 1.134 1.536
50 -28 -33.3 0.939 0.983 1.184 1.755
Table 5, Propylene Glycol Factors for Models AGZ 140D to 190D

Freeze Point
% P.G. o o Capacity Power Flow PD
F C
10 26 -3.3 0.988 0.996 1.019 1.097
20 19 -7.2 0.972 0.992 1.035 1.201
30 9 -12.8 0.951 0.987 1.059 1.351
40 -5 -20.6 0.926 0.979 1.095 1.598
50 -27 -32.8 0.906 0.974 1.142 2.039
The maximum water temperature that can be

Altitude Correction Factors circulated through the evaporator in a non-
Performance tables are based at sea level. operating mode is 100°F (37.8°C).
Elevations other than sea level affect the
Fouling Factor
performance of the unit. The decreased air
Performance tables are based on water with a
density will reduce condenser capacity
fouling factor of:
consequently reducing the unit's performance. 2 2
For performance at elevations other than sea 0.0001 ft × hr × ° F / BTU or (0.0176m × °C / kW )
level, refer to Table 6 and Table 7. per ARI 550/590-98.
Evaporator Temperature Drop As fouling is increased, performance
Factors decreases. For performance at other than
Performance tables are based on a 10°F (5°C) 0.0001 (0.0176) fouling factor, refer to Table 6
temperature drop through the evaporator. or Table 7.
Adjustment factors for applications with Foreign matter in the chilled water
temperature ranges from 6°F to 16°F (3.3°C to system will adversely affect the heat
8.9°C) are in Table 6 and Table 7. transfer capability of the evaporator
Temperature drops outside this 6°F to 16°F and could increase the pressure drop
(3.3°C to 8.9°C) range can affect the control and reduce the water flow. Maintain
system's capability to maintain acceptable proper water treatment to provide
control and are not recommended. optimum unit operation.

Table 6, Capacity and Power Derates, Models AGZ 025D to 130D
Chilled Water Delta Fouling Factor
Altitude T 0.0001 (0.0176) 0.00025 (0.044) 0.00075 (0.132) 0.00175 (0.308)
°F °C Cap. Power Cap. Power Cap. Power Cap. Power
6 3.3 0.978 0.993 0.975 0.991 0.963 0.987 0.940 0.980
8 4.4 0.989 0.996 0.986 0.994 0.973 0.990 0.950 0.983
Sea 10 5.6 1.000 1.000 0.996 0.999 0.984 0.994 0.961 0.987
Level 12 6.7 1.009 1.003 1.005 1.001 0.993 0.997 0.969 0.990
14 7.7 1.018 1.004 1.014 1.003 1.002 0.999 0.978 0.991
16 8.9 1.025 1.007 1.021 1.006 1.009 1.001 0.985 0.994
6 3.3 0.977 1.001 0.973 1.000 0.961 0.996 0.938 0.989
8 4.4 0.987 1.006 0.984 1.004 0.971 1.000 0.948 0.993
10 5.6 0.998 1.009 0.995 1.007 0.982 1.003 0.959 0.996
2000 feet
12 6.7 1.007 1.011 1.004 1.010 0.991 1.006 0.967 0.998
14 7.7 1.014 1.014 1.011 1.013 0.998 1.009 0.974 1.001
16 8.9 1.022 1.016 1.018 1.014 1.005 1.010 0.981 1.003
6 3.3 0.973 1.011 0.970 1.010 0.957 1.006 0.935 0.998
8 4.4 0.984 1.014 0.980 1.013 0.968 1.009 0.945 1.001
10 5.6 0.995 1.019 0.991 1.017 0.979 1.013 0.955 1.005
4000 feet
12 6.7 1.004 1.021 1.000 1.020 0.987 1.016 0.964 1.008
14 7.7 1.011 1.024 1.007 1.023 0.994 1.018 0.971 1.011
16 8.9 1.018 1.027 1.014 1.026 1.002 1.021 0.978 1.014
6 3.3 0.969 1.021 0.966 1.020 0.954 1.016 0.931 1.008
8 4.4 0.980 1.026 0.977 1.024 0.964 1.020 0.942 1.013
10 5.6 0.989 1.029 0.986 1.027 0.973 1.023 0.950 1.015
6000 feet
12 6.7 0.998 1.033 0.995 1.031 0.982 1.027 0.959 1.020
14 7.7 1.007 1.036 1.004 1.034 0.991 1.030 0.967 1.022
16 8.9 1.014 1.037 1.011 1.036 0.998 1.031 0.974 1.024

Table 7, Capacity and Power Derates, Models AGZ 140D to 190D
Chilled Water Fouling Factor
Altitude Delta T 0.0001 (0.0176) 0.00025 (0.044) 0.00075 (0.132) 0.00175 (0.308)
°F °C Cap. Power Cap. Power Cap. Power Cap. Power
6 3.3 0.990 0.997 0.976 0.994 0.937 0.983 0.868 0.964
8 4.4 0.994 0.998 0.981 0.995 0.942 0.984 0.872 0.965
Sea 10 5.6 1.000 1.000 0.987 0.996 0.947 0.986 0.877 0.967
Level 12 6.7 1.005 1.001 0.991 0.997 0.951 0.986 0.881 0.968
14 7.7 1.009 1.002 0.995 0.998 0.955 0.987 0.884 0.968
16 8.9 1.013 1.004 1.000 1.000 0.960 0.989 0.889 0.970
6 3.3 0.987 1.005 0.974 1.002 0.934 0.991 0.865 0.972
8 4.4 0.992 1.006 0.979 1.003 0.940 0.992 0.870 0.973
10 5.6 0.997 1.008 0.984 1.004 0.944 0.994 0.875 0.975
2000 feet
12 6.7 1.002 1.009 0.989 1.005 0.949 0.994 0.879 0.975
14 7.7 1.007 1.011 0.993 1.007 0.953 0.996 0.883 0.977
16 8.9 1.011 1.012 0.998 1.008 0.958 0.997 0.887 0.978
6 3.3 0.985 1.014 0.972 1.010 0.933 0.999 0.864 0.980
8 4.4 0.991 1.015 0.977 1.012 0.938 1.001 0.869 0.981
10 5.6 0.995 1.016 0.982 1.013 0.943 1.002 0.873 0.982
4000 feet
12 6.7 1.000 1.018 0.987 1.014 0.947 1.003 0.877 0.984
14 6.8 1.005 1.019 0.991 1.015 0.951 1.004 0.881 0.985
16 8.9 1.009 1.021 0.995 1.017 0.955 1.006 0.884 0.987
6 3.3 0.982 1.023 0.969 1.020 0.930 1.009 0.861 0.989
8 4.4 0.988 1.025 0.975 1.022 0.935 1.010 0.866 0.991
10 5.6 0.992 1.026 0.979 1.022 0.940 1.011 0.870 0.992
6000 feet
12 6.7 0.997 1.028 0.984 1.024 0.944 1.013 0.875 0.994
14 7.7 1.002 1.029 0.989 1.025 0.949 1.014 0.879 0.995
16 8.9 1.006 1.031 0.992 1.027 0.952 1.016 0.882 0.996
6 3.3 0.979 1.034 0.966 1.031 0.927 1.019 0.859 1.000
8 4.4 0.984 1.036 0.971 1.032 0.932 1.021 0.863 1.002
10 5.6 0.990 1.037 0.976 1.033 0.937 1.022 0.868 1.002
8000 feet
12 6.7 0.993 1.039 0.980 1.035 0.941 1.024 0.871 1.004
14 7.7 0.998 1.041 0.985 1.037 0.945 1.026 0.875 1.006
16 8.9 1.003 1.041 0.990 1.038 0.950 1.026 0.879 1.007
Evaporator Freeze Protection vent connections are provided on the

evaporator to ease draining.
Evaporator freeze-up can be a concern in the
application of air-cooled water chillers. To 2. Add a glycol solution to the chilled water
protect against freeze-up, insulation and an system to provide freeze protection.
electric heater cable are furnished with the Freeze point should be approximately ten
unit. This protects the evaporator down to - degrees below minimum design ambient
20°F (-29°C) ambient air temperature. temperature.
Although the evaporator is equipped with 3. The addition of thermostatically controlled
freeze protection, it does not protect water heat and insulation to exposed piping.
piping external to the unit or the evaporator 4. Continuous circulation of water through
itself if there is a power failure or heater cable the chilled water piping and evaporator.
burnout. Consider the following
recommendations for additional protection. The evaporator heater cable is factory wired to
the 115-volt circuit in the control box. This
1. If the unit will not be operated during the power should be supplied from a separate
winter, drain evaporator and chilled water source, but it can be supplied from the control
piping and flush with glycol. Drain and circuit. Operation of the heater cable is

automatic through the ambient sensing the evaporator is drained in the winter, the
thermostat that energizes the evaporator heater disconnect switch to the evaporator heater
cable for protection against freeze-up. Unless must not be open.
Operating/Standby Limits
• Maximum standby ambient air temperature, 131°F (55°C)
• Maximum operating ambient air temperature (standard) 104°F (40°C)
• Maximum operating ambient air temperature (optional high ambient ) 125°F (52°C)
• Minimum operating ambient temperature (standard), 35°F (2°C)
• Minimum operating ambient temperature (with optional low-ambient control), -10°F (-23.3°C)
• Leaving chilled water temperature, 40°F to 60°F (2°C to 16°C)
• Leaving chilled fluid temperatures (with anti-freeze), 15°F to 60°F (-9°C to 16°C)
• Chilled water Delta-T range, 6°F to 16°F (3.3°C to 8.9°C)
• Part load minimum flow for variable flow systems, varies with unit size; see Table 8, page 11.
• Maximum operating inlet fluid temperature, 76°F (24°C)
• Maximum non-operating inlet fluid temperature, 100°F (38°C).
Pressure Drop Curves

Minimum Allowable Flow Rates
In order to maximize energy savings from variable flow systems, the AGZD chiller employs different
control strategies for constant-f low chilled water systems as compared to variable-flow systems.
A chiller controller setpoint selects the proper controller operation. The software setting of Variable
Evap. Flow equals YES or NO is located just below the “Full Cap D-T” setting screen.
The Full Cap D-T setting will continue to allow settings from 6 to 16 F Delta-T for full load operation.
Constant-Chilled Water Flow Systems
The minimum allowable flow is determined by the chiller model. Operating with flows below these
values can cause unstable operation.
Variable-Chilled Water Flow Systems

For models AGZ 025D through AGZ 130D the part load flow rate in a variable chilled water flow
system is 40% of nominal catalog full load flow (rated catalog tons x 2.4 = full load GPM). These
minimum allowable flows are calculated to allow the chilled water flow to decrease progressively as
the unit capacity decreases, but is restricted to 40% of rated full load flow.
The larger AGZ 140D to190D units have shell and tube evaporators and will operate at the same
minimum flow rate as for constant flow (62.5% of nominal catalog full load flow rate.)
When “Variable Evap Flow” is selected as YES – the unit software will increase the control band
progressively as the unit capacity steps to the lower stages of 75%, 50% and 25% load for the four
compressors. This prevents short cycling and allows for decreasing minimum water flow as the unit
capacity decreases. The 6 compressor units will have a similar operation but with software
calculations based on 6 capacity steps.
Refer to Table 8 on page 11 for the allowable reduced minimum flows.

Pressure Drop Curves
The pressure drop for any given unit is the same regardless of constant or variable flow. Only the
lower cutoff point for minimum flow will change.
Table 8 on page 11 contains the evaporator reference letter and the minimum and maximum flows
allowed for each unit. Occasionally the same evaporator is used on multiple units resulting in
overlapping lines.
The nominal and maximum flow and pressure drop are the same for a given unit size regardless of
having fixed or variable flow.
The curves are based on water use only. Use glycol adjustment factors located in the catalog
Performance Section as required.
Figure 1, Evaporator Pressure Drops

See following page for curve cross-reference and min/max flow rates.

Table 8, Curve Cross-Reference, Min/Nominal/Max Flows
Variable Flow System Fixed Flow System

Only Only Fixed and Variable Flow Systems
AGZ
Curve Minimum Flow Rate Minimum Flow Rate Nominal Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate
Model
Ref. IP SI IP SI IP SI IP SI
DP
GPM DP ft. lps kpa GPM DP ft. lps DP kpa GPM DP ft. lps DP kpa GPM DP ft. lps DP kpa
025D A 26.4 1.6 1.7 4.8 41.3 3.8 2.6 11.5 66.0 9.4 4.2 28.1 110.0 24.8 6.9 74.1
030D B 30.3 2.2 1.9 6.4 47.4 5.0 3.0 15.0 75.8 12.3 4.8 36.7 126.3 32.4 8.0 96.8
035D C 33.5 2.4 2.1 7.1 52.4 5.4 3.3 16.1 83.8 13.6 5.3 40.6 139.7 35.9 8.8 107.3
040D D 36.4 2.4 2.3 7.1 56.9 5.4 3.6 16.1 91.0 13.5 5.7 40.4 151.7 35.6 9.6 106.4
045D E 40.9 2.3 2.6 6.9 63.9 5.3 4.0 15.8 102.2 13.2 6.4 39.5 170.3 34.8 10.7 104.0
050D F 46.2 2.6 2.9 7.8 72.1 6.1 4.6 18.2 115.4 14.9 7.3 44.5 192.3 39.3 12.1 117.5
055D G 49.5 2.3 3.1 7.0 77.4 5.4 4.9 16.3 123.8 13.3 7.8 39.7 206.3 35.1 13.0 104.9
060D H 53.8 2.2 3.4 6.6 84.1 5.1 5.3 15.3 134.6 12.5 8.5 37.3 224.3 33.0 14.2 98.6
065D I 55.8 1.9 3.5 5.8 87.1 4.5 5.5 13.4 139.4 11.0 8.8 32.8 232.3 29.0 14.7 86.7
070D J 61.5 2.3 3.9 7.0 96.1 5.4 6.1 16.3 153.8 13.3 9.7 39.7 256.3 35.1 16.2 104.9
075D J 70.2 2.3 4.4 6.8 109.6 5.3 6.9 15.8 175.4 12.9 11.1 38.5 292.3 34.0 18.4 101.6
080D L 77.8 2.2 4.9 6.7 121.6 5.2 7.7 15.6 194.6 12.8 12.3 38.2 324.3 33.8 20.5 101.0
090D M 85.6 2.4 5.4 7.1 133.8 5.4 8.4 16.1 214.1 13.5 13.5 40.4 356.8 35.1 22.5 104.9
100D N 95.8 2.2 6.0 6.6 149.7 5.2 9.4 15.4 239.5 12.6 15.1 37.6 399.2 33.3 25.2 99.5
110D O 101.8 2.3 6.4 6.8 159.1 5.3 10.0 15.9 254.6 13.0 16.1 38.8 424.3 34.3 26.8 102.5
125D P 112.4 2.3 7.1 6.9 175.6 5.4 11.1 16.1 281.0 13.2 17.7 39.7 468.3 34.8 29.5 104.0
130D Q 124.3 2.4 7.8 7.2 194.3 5.5 12.3 16.5 310.8 13.5 19.6 40.4 518.0 35.6 32.7 106.4
140D R 204.3 4.8 12.9 14.4 204.3 4.8 12.9 14.4 326.9 11.8 20.6 35.2 544.8 31.1 34.4 93.0
160D S 229.9 5.9 14.5 17.7 229.9 5.9 14.5 17.7 367.9 14.5 23.2 43.3 613.2 38.3 38.7 114.5
180D T 258.3 7.4 16.3 22.0 258.3 7.4 16.3 22.0 413.3 18.0 26.1 53.7 688.8 47.5 43.5 142.0
190D U 270.1 9.0 17.0 26.9 270.1 9.0 17.0 26.9 432.2 22.0 27.3 65.7 720.3 58.1 45.4 173.7

Figure 2, Typical Field Control Wiring

MicroTech III Controller
Controller Section Table of Contents

Overview........................................................................................................................14
Controller Inputs and Outputs .......................................................................................14
Setpoints ........................................................................................................................16
Security ..........................................................................................................................19
Unit Control Functions ..................................................................................................19
Unit Enable ....................................................................................................................21
Unit Mode Selection ......................................................................................................21
Unit States ......................................................................................................................22
Start Delays ....................................................................................................................22
Evaporator Pump Control ..............................................................................................24
Leaving Water Temperature (LWT) Reset/Target .........................................................25
Unit Capacity Control ....................................................................................................26
Unit Capacity Overrides……………………………………………………………….27
Circuit Control Functions ..............................................................................................29
Circuit Control Logic.....................................................................................................29
Pumpdown Procedure ....................................................................................................31
Compressor Control .......................................................................................................31
Condenser Fan Control ..................................................................................................32
EXV Control ..................................................................................................................34
Liquid Line Solenoid .....................................................................................................35
Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid ..............................................................................................35
Alarms............................................................................................................................35
Events…………………………………………………………………………....…….42
Clearing Alarms .............................................................................................................44
Using the Controller…………………………………………………………………...46

Overview
The MicroTech® III controller’s state-of-the-art design not only permits the chiller to run more
efficiently, but also can simplify troubleshooting if a system failure occurs. Every MicroTech IIII
controller is programmed and tested prior to shipment to facilitate start-up.
Operator-friendly
The MicroTech III controller menu structure is separated into three distinct categories that provide the
operator or service technician with a full description of :
1. current unit status
2. control parameters
3. alarms. Security protection prevents unauthorized changing of the setpoints and control parameters.
MicroTech III control continuously performs self-diagnostic checks, monitoring system temperatures,
pressures and protection devices, and will automatically shut down a compressor or the entire unit
should a fault occur. The cause of the shutdown will be retained in memory and can be easily
displayed in plain English for operator review. The MicroTech III chiller controller will also retain
and display the date/time the fault occurred. In addition to displaying alarm diagnostics, the
MicroTech III chiller controller also provides the operator with a warning of limit (pre-alarm)
conditions.
Controller Inputs and Outputs
Main Controller
Table 9, Analog Inputs
# Description Type Expected Range
AI1 Evaporator EWT NTC 10k 340 to 300k Ω
AI2 Evaporator LWT NTC 10k 340 to 300k Ω
Outside Ambient
AI3 NTC 10k 340 to 300k Ω
Temperature
X1 Demand Limit 4-20 mA 1 to 23 mA
X4 LWT Reset 4-20 mA 1 to 23 mA
Table 10, Analog Outputs

# Description Output Type Range
X5 Circuit 1 Fan VFD Speed Voltage 0 to 10 volts
X6 Circuit 2 Fan VFD Speed Voltage 0 to 10 volts
Table 11, Digital Inputs

Description Signal Off Signal On
DI1 External Alarm/Event External Fault No External Fault
DI2 Evaporator Flow Switch No Flow Flow
Double Set Point/ Mode See sections on Unit Mode Selection and LWT
DI3
Switch Target
DI4 Remote Switch Remote Disable Remote Enable
DI5 Unit Switch Unit Disable Unit Enable

Table 12, Digital Outputs
Description Output Off Output On
DO1 Evaporator Water Pump 1 Pump Off Pump On
DO2 Alarm Indicator Alarm Not Active Alarm Active
DO3 Circuit 1 Fan Output 1 Fan(s) Off Fan(s) On
Compressor Module 1
Analog Inputs
Description Signal Type Expected Range
X1 Circuit 1 Suction Temperature NTC 10k 340 to 300k Ω
X2 Circuit 1 Evaporator Pressure Voltage 0.4 to 4.6 volts
X4 Circuit 1 Condenser Pressure Voltage 0.4 to 4.6 volts
Digital Inputs
X6 Circuit 1 Switch Circuit Disable Circuit Enable
X7 Circuit 1 MHP Switch Fault No fault
X8 Circuit 1 Motor Protection Fault No fault
DI1 Circuit 1 (or Unit) PVM/GFP Fault No fault
Digital Outputs
DO1 Compressor #1 Compressor Off Compressor On
DO4 Evaporator Water Pump 2 Pump Off Pump On
DO5 Circuit 1 Hot Gas Bypass SV Solenoid Closed Solenoid Open
DO6 Circuit 1 Liquid Line SV Solenoid Closed Solenoid Open
Compressor Module 2
Analog Inputs
Description Signal Type Expected Range
X1 Circuit 2 Suction Temperature NTC 10k 340 to 300k Ω
X2 Circuit 2 Evaporator Pressure Voltage 0.4 to 4.6 volts
X4 Circuit 2 Condenser Pressure Voltage 0.4 to 4.6 volts
Digital Inputs
X6 Circuit 2 Switch Circuit Disable Circuit Enable
X7 Circuit 2 MHP Switch Fault No fault
X8 Circuit 2 Motor Protection Fault No fault
DI1 Circuit 2 PVM/GFP Fault No fault
Note: The Motor Protection and MHP input signal are wired in series. If Motor Protection input is
open, MHP Switch input will also be open.

Digital Outputs
DO5 Circuit 2 Hot Gas Bypass SV Solenoid Closed Solenoid Open
DO6 Circuit 2 Liquid Line SV Solenoid Closed Solenoid Open
EXV Module 1 and 2

These modules will be used only when the expansion valve type is electronic.
Digital Outputs
Stepper Motor Output

Description
M1+, M1- EXV Stepper Coil 1
M2+, M2- EXV Stepper Coil 2
Sensor Information
Temperature
All temperature sensors will be Daikin Applied part number 1934146.
Pressure
Pressure inputs will be read using 0 to 5 volt ratiometric sensors. Nominal voltage range will be 0.5
to 4.5 volts.
Pressure on the low side will be measured using Daikin Applied part number 331764501.
Pressure on the high side will be measured using Daikin Applied part number 331764601.
Actuator Information
• The electronic expansion valves used are Daikin Applied part number 33038620X. The valves all
use the same bipolar stepper motor.
Setpoints
Setpoints are stored in permanent memory.
SetPoint Tables
Setpoints are initially set to the values in the Default column, and can be adjusted to any value in the
Range column.

Unit Level Setpoints:
Description Default Range
Mode/Enabling
Unit Enable Enable Disable, Enable
Network Unit Enable Disable Disable, Enable
Control source Local Local, Network
Cool, Cool w/Glycol, Cool/Ice w/Glycol
Available Modes Cool
Ice, Test
Network Mode Command Cool Cool, Ice
Staging and Capacity Control

See
Cool LWT 1 7°C (44.6°F)
Auto Adjusted Ranges, page 19
See
Cool LWT 2 7°C (44.6°F)
Ice LWT 4.4°C (39.9°F) -9.5 to 4.4 °C (14.9 to 39.9 °F)
See
Network Cool Set Point 7°C (44.6°F)
Network Ice Set Point 4.4°C (39.9°F) -9.5 to 4.4 °C (14.9 to 39.9 °F)
Startup Delta T 5.6°C (10.1°F) 0.6 to 8.3 °C (1.1 to 14.9 °F)
Shut Down Delta T 0.3°C (0.5°F) 0.3 to 1.7 °C (0.5 to 3.1 °F)
Max Pulldown 0.6°C/min (1.1°F/min) 0.1 to 2.7 °C/min (0.2 to 4.9 °F/min)
Nominal Evap Delta T 5.6 °C (10.1°F) 3.3 to 8.9 °C (5.9 to 16 °F)
Demand Limit Enable Off Off, On
Network Capacity Limit 100% 0 to 100%
LWT Reset Enable Off Off, On
Configuration
Power Input Single Point Single Point, Multi Point
#1 Only, #2 Only, Auto,
Evap Control #1 Only
#1 Primary, #2 Primary
Number of Compressors 4 4,6
Expansion Valve Type Thermal Thermal, Electronic
Fan VFD enable No No, Yes
Number of fans 4 4,6,8,10,12,14
Timers
Evap Recirc Timer 90 15 to 300 seconds
Stage Up Delay 240 sec 120 to 480 sec
Stage Down Delay 30 sec 20 to 60 sec
Stage Delay Clear No No, Yes
Start-start timer 15 min 10-60 minutes
Stop-start timer 5 min 3-20 minutes
Clear Cycle Timers No No, yes
Ice Time Delay 12 1-23 hours
Clear Ice Timer No No,Yes
Sensor Offsets
Evap LWT sensor offset 0°C (0°F) -5.0 to 5.0 °C (-9.0 to 9.0 °F)
Evap EWT sensor offset 0°C (0°F) -5.0 to 5.0 °C (-9.0 to 9.0 °F)
OAT sensor offset 0°C (0°F) -5.0 to 5.0 °C (-9.0 to 9.0 °F)
Alarm Settings
Low Evap Pressure Unload 689.5 KPA(100 PSI) See section 5.1.1

Low Evap Pressure Hold 696.4 KPA(101 PSI) See section 5.1.1
High Condenser Pressure 4240 KPA(615 PSI) 3310 to 4275 KPA (480 to 620 PSI)
High Condenser Pressure Unload 4137 KPA(600 PSI) 3241 to 4137 KPA (470 to 600 PSI)
Evaporator Flow Proof 5 sec 5 to 15 sec
Recirculate Timeout 3 min 1 to 10 min
See
Evaporator Water Freeze 2.2°C (36°F)
Low OAT Start Time 165 sec 150 to 240 sec
External Alarm Configuration Event Event, Alarm
Clear Alarms Off Off, On
Network Clear Alarms Off Off, On
Circuit Setpoints (exist individually for each circuit):

Mode/Enabling
Circuit mode Enable Disable, Enable, Test
Compressor 1 Enable Enable Enable, Disable
Network Compressor 1 Enable Enable Enable, Disable
EXV control Auto Auto, manual
See Special Setpoints,
EXV position 0% to 100%
page 19
Suction SH Target 5.56°C (10°F) 4.44 to 6.67 °C (8 to 12 °F)
Max Evap Pressure 1076 KPA(156.1 PSI) 979 to 1172 KPA (142 to 170 PSI)
Condenser
Condenser Target 100% 37.8°C (100°F) 32.22 to 48.9 °C (90 to 120 °F)
VFD Max Speed 100% 90 to 110%

VFD Min Speed 25% 25 to 60%
Fan Stage Up Deadband 1 8.33°C (15°F) 8.33 to 13.89 °C (15 to 25 °F)
Fan Stage Down Deadband 1 11.11°C (20°F) 8.33 to11.11 °C (15 to 20 °F)
Fan Stage Down Deadband 2 11.11°C (20°F) 8.33 to11.11 °C (15 to 20 °F)
Fan Stage Down Deadband 3 8.33 °C (15 °F) 5.56 to 8.33 °C (10 to 15 °F)
Fan Stage Down Deadband 4 5.56 °C (10 °F) 3.33 to 5.56 °C (6 to 10 °F)
Sensor Offsets
Evap pressure offset 0 KPA (0 PSI) -100 to 100 KPA (-14.5 to 14.5 PSI)
Cond pressure offset 0 KPA (0 PSI) -100 to 100 KPA (-14.5 to 14.5 PSI)
Suction temp offset 0°C (0°F) -5.0 to 5.0 °C (-9.0 to 9.0 °F)
Note – Condenser Target 67% and Condenser Target 33% will be available only when Number of
Compressors is 6. Condenser Target 50% will be available only when Number of Compressors is 4.

Auto Adjusted Ranges
Some settings have different ranges of adjustment based on other settings:
Cool LWT 1, Cool LWT 2, and Network Cool Set Point

Available Mode Selection Range
Without Glycol 4.4 to 15.6 °C (39.9 to 60.1 °F)
With Glycol -9.5 to 15.6 °C (14.9 to 60.1 °F)
Evaporator Water Freeze

Without Glycol 2.2 to 5.6 °C (36 to 42.1 °F)
With Glycol -10.8 to 5.6 °C (12.6 to 42.1 °F)
Low Evaporator Pressure Hold and Unload

Without Glycol 669 to 793 KPA (97 to 115 PSI)
With Glycol 407 to 793 KPA (59 to 115 PSI)
Special Set Point Operations

The following setpoints are not changeable unless the unit switch is off:
• Available Modes
• Number of Compressors
• Expansion Valve Type
• Number of Fans
• Fan VFD Enable
The Circuit Mode setpoints should not be changeable unless the corresponding circuit switch is off.
The Compressor Enable setpoints should not be changeable unless the corresponding compressor is
not running.
EXV Position set point on each circuit follows the actual EXV position while EXV Control = Auto.
When EXV Control = Manual, the position set point should be changeable.
The Clear Alarms and Network Clear Alarms settings are automatically set back to Off after being On
for 1 second.
Security
All setpoints are protected using passwords. A four-digit password provides operator access to changeable
parameters. Service level passwords are reserved for authorized service personnel. .
Operator password: 2526
Entering Passwords
Passwords are entered on the first screen on the unit controller,
If the wrong password is entered, a message will temporarily appear stating this. If no valid password is
active the active password level displays “none”.
Editing Setpoints
After a valid password has been entered at the unit controller, setpoints may be changed. If the operator
attempts to edit a setpoint for which the necessary password level is not active, no action will be taken. Once
a password has been entered, it remains valid for 10 minutes after the last key-press on the unit controller.

Unit Functions
Definitions
The calculations in this section are used in unit level and circuit control logic.
LWT Slope
LWT slope is calculated such that the slope represents the estimated change in LWT over a time frame of one
minute.
Pulldown Rate
The slope value calculated above will be a negative value as the water temperature is dropping. A pulldown
rate is calculated by inverting the slope value and limiting to a minimum value of 0°C/min.
LWT Error
LWT error is calculated as: LWT – LWT target
Unit Capacity
For applying unit capacity limits, an estimate of total unit capacity is needed. Unit capacity will be based on
the estimated circuit capacities.
The unit capacity is the number of compressors running (on circuits that are not pumping down) divided by
the number of compressors on the unit.
Control Band
The Control Band defines the band in which unit capacity will not be increased or decreased.
The Control Band is calculated as follows:
• Four compressor units: Control Band = Nominal Evap Delta T Set Point * 0.3
• Six compressor units: Control Band = Nominal Evap Delta T Set Point * 0.2
Staging Temperatures
If the unit is configured for use without glycol:
When the LWT target is more than half the Control Band above 3.9°C (39.0°F)
• Stage Up Temperature = LWT target + (Control Band/2)
• Stage Down Temperature = LWT target – (Control Band/2)
If the LWT target is less than half the Control Band above 3.9°C (39.0°F)
• Stage Down Temperature = LWT target – (LWT target - 3.9°C)
• Stage Up temperature = LWT target + Control Band – (LWT target – 3.9°C)
If the unit is configured for use with glycol, the compressor staging temperatures are calculated as shown
below:
• Stage Up Temperature = LWT target + (Control Band/2)
• Stage Down Temperature = LWT target – (Control Band/2)
The Start up and Shutdown temperatures are referenced from the Control Band:
• Start Up Temperature = Stage Up Temperature + Start Up Delta set point
• Shutdown Temperature = Stage Down Temperature – Shutdown Delta set point

Unit Enable
Enabling and disabling the chiller is accomplished using setpoints and inputs to the chiller. The unit switch,
remote switch input, and Unit Enable Set Point all are required to be ‘on’ for the unit to be enabled when the
control source is set to ‘local’. The same is true if the control source is set to ‘network’, with the additional
requirement that the building automation system (BAS) Enable set point must be ‘on’. The BAS should
enable the chiller only when there is a demand for cooling.
Unit is enabled according to the following table:
Unit Control Source Remote Unit Enable BAS Enable
Unit Enable
Switch Set Point Switch Input Set Point Set Point
Off Off
Off Off
Off Off
On Local On On On
Network Off Off
On Network On On On On
Unit Mode Selection

The operating mode of the unit is determined by setpoints and inputs to the chiller. The Available Modes Set
Point determines what modes of operation can be used. This set point also determines whether the unit is
configured for glycol use. The Control Source Set Point determines where a command to change modes will
come from. A digital input switches between cool mode and ice mode if they are available and the control
source is set to ‘local.’ The BAS mode request switches between cool mode and ice mode if they are both
available and the control source is set to ‘network.’
The Available Modes Set Point should only be changeable when the unit switch is off. This is to avoid
changing modes of operation inadvertently while the chiller is running.
Unit Mode is set according to the following table:
Control Source Mode BAS Available Modes

Unit Mode
Set Point Input Request Set Point
Cool Cool
Cool w/Glycol Cool

Local Off Cool/Ice w/Glycol Cool
Local On Cool/Ice w/Glycol Ice
Network Cool Cool/Ice w/Glycol Cool
Network Ice Cool/Ice w/Glycol Ice
Ice w/Glycol Ice
Test Test
Glycol Configuration
If the Available Modes Set Point is set to an option ‘w/Glycol’, then glycol operation should be enabled for
the unit. Glycol operation should only be disabled when the Available Modes Set Point is set to ‘Cool’.

Unit States
The unit will always be in one of three states:
Off – Unit is not enabled to run
Auto – Unit is enabled to run
Pumpdown – Unit is doing a normal shutdown
Transitions between these states are shown in the following diagram.
POWER
OFF
ON
T1
T3
T4
PUMPDOWN T2 AUTO
Diagram explanation on following page.

T1 - Off to Auto
All of the following are required:
• Unit Enable = On
• No Unit Alarm
• A circuit is enabled to start
• If Unit Mode = Ice then Ice Delay not active
T2 - Auto to Pumpdown
Any of the following are required:
• Unit Enable = Off and Unit Switch is closed
• Unit Mode = Ice AND LWT target is reached
• Unit Pumpdown Alarm active
T3 - Pumpdown to Off
• Unit rapid stop alarm active
• All circuits complete pumpdown
• Unit Switch open
T4 - Auto to Off
• Unit rapid stop alarm active
• No circuit enabled and no compressors running
• Unit Switch open
compressor can start for 150 seconds. In addition,
Power Up Start Delay the motor protect inputs are ignored during this
After powering up the unit, the motor protectors time so as to avoid tripping a false alarm.
may not be engaged for up to 150 seconds.
Therefore, after the control is powered up, no

Ice Mode Start Delay The ice delay timer may be manually cleared to
force a restart in ice mode. A set point specifically
An adjustable start to start ice delay timer will
for clearing the ice mode delay is available. In
limit the frequency with which the chiller may
addition, cycling the power to the controller
start in Ice mode. The timer starts when the first
should clear the ice delay timer.
compressor starts while the unit is in ice mode.
While this timer is active, the chiller cannot restart
in Ice mode. The time delay is adjustable via the
Ice Time Delay set point.
Unit Status
The displayed unit status should be determined by the conditions in the following table:
Enum Status Conditions

0 Auto Unit State = Auto
1 Motor Prot Delay Unit State = Auto and MP start up delay is active
2 Off:Ice Mode Timer Unit State = Off, Unit Mode = Ice, and Ice Delay = Active
3 Off:OAT Lockout Unit State = Off and Low OAT Lockout is active
4 Off:All Cir Disabled Unit State = Off and both circuits unavailable
5 Off:Unit Alarm Unit State = Off and Unit Alarm active
6 Off:Keypad Disable Unit State = Off and Unit Enable Set Point = Disable
7 Off:Remote Switch Unit State = Off and Remote Switch is open
Unit State = Off, Control Source = Network, and BAS Enable =
8 Off:BAS Disable
false
9 Off:Unit Switch Unit State = Off and Unit Switch = Disable
10 Off:Test Mode Unit State = Off and Unit Mode = Test
Unit State = Auto, no circuits running, and LWT is less than the
11 Auto:Wait for load
active set point + startup delta
12 Auto:Evap Recirc Unit State = Auto and Evaporator State = Start
Unit State = Auto, Evaporator State = Start, and Flow Switch is
13 Auto:Wait for flow
open
14 Auto:Pumpdown Unit State = Pumpdown
15 Auto:Max Pulldown Unit State = Auto, max pulldown rate has been met or exceeded
16 Auto:Unit Cap Limit Unit State = Auto, unit capacity limit has been met or exceeded
17 Auto: High Ambient Limit ---
Config Changed, Reboot A configuration change requiring a reboot has occurred but
18
Required controller has not been rebooted yet.

Evaporator Pump Control
For control of the evaporator pumps, three evaporator pump control states should be used:
Off - No pump on.

• Start – Pump is on, water loop is being recirculated.
• Run – Pump is on, water loop has been recirculated and circuits can start if needed.
POWER
OFF
ON
T1
T3
T4
T2
RUN START
T5
T1 – Off to Start
Requires any of the following
• Unit state = Auto
• LWT is equal to the Evap Freeze set point and LWT sensor fault isn’t active
T2 – Start to Run
Requires the following
• Flow ok for time longer than evaporator recirculate time set point
T3 – Run to Off
Requires all of the following
• Unit state is Off
• LWT is higher than the Evap Freeze set point or LWT sensor fault is active
T4 – Start to Off
Requires all of the following
• Unit state is Off
• LWT is higher than the Evap Freeze set point or LWT sensor fault is active
T5 – Run to Start
This transition should occur per the requirements for pump staging and evaporator flow loss alarm.
Pump selection
The pump output used will be determined by the Evap Pump Control set point. This setting allows the
following configurations:

• #1 only – Pump 1 will always be used
• #2 only – Pump 2 will always be used
• Auto – The primary pump is the one with the least run hours, the other is used as a backup
• #1 Primary – Pump 1 is used normally, with pump 2 as a backup
• #2 Primary – Pump 2 is used normally, with pump 1 as a backup
Primary/Standby Pump Staging

The pump designated as primary will start first. If the evaporator state is start for a time greater than the
recirculate timeout set point and there is no flow, then the primary pump will shut off and the standby
pump will start. When the evaporator is in the run state, if flow is lost for more than half of the flow
proof set point value, the primary pump will shut off and the standby pump will start. Once the standby
pump is started, the flow loss alarm logic will apply if flow cannot be established in the evaporator start
state, or if flow is lost in the evaporator run state.
Auto Control
If auto pump control is selected, the primary/standby logic above is still used. When the evaporator is
not in the run state, the run hours of the pumps will be compared. The pump with the least hours will be
designated as the primary at this time.
LWT Target
The LWT Target varies based on settings and inputs.
The base LWT Target is selected as follows:
Control Source Mode BAS Available Modes

Base LWT Target
Set Point Input Request Set Point
Local OFF COOL Cool Set Point 1
Local ON COOL Cool Set Point 2
Network COOL BAS Cool Set Point
Local OFF COOL w/Glycol Cool Set Point 1

Local ON COOL w/Glycol Cool Set Point 2
Network COOL w/Glycol BAS Cool Set Point
Local OFF COOL/ICE Cool Set Point 1
w/Glycol
Local ON COOL/ICE Ice Set Point
w/Glycol
Network COOL COOL/ICE BAS Cool Set Point
w/Glycol
Network ICE COOL/ICE BAS Ice Set Point
w/Glycol
Local ICE w/Glycol Ice Set Point
Network ICE w/Glycol BAS Ice Set Point
Leaving Water Temperature (LWT) Reset

The base LWT target may be reset if the unit is in Cool mode and LWT reset is enabled via the set
point.
The reset amount is adjusted based on the 4 to 20 mA reset input. Reset is 0° if the reset signal is less
than or equal to 4 mA. Reset is 5.56°C (10.0°F) if the reset signal equals or exceeds 20 mA. The
amount of reset will vary linearly between these extremes if the reset signal is between 4 mA and 20
mA.

When the reset amount increases, the Active LWT Target is changed at a rate of 0.1°C every 10
seconds. When the active reset decreases, the Active LWT Target is changed all at once.
After the reset is applied, the LWT target can never exceed a value of 15.56°C (60°F).
Unit Capacity Control

Unit capacity control will be performed as described in this section. All unit capacity limits described in
following sections must be applied as described.
Compressor Staging in Cool Mode
The first compressor on the unit should be started when evaporator LWT is higher than the Startup
Temperature.
Additional compressors can be started when Evaporator LWT is higher than the Stage Up Temperature and
the Stage Up Delay is not active.
When multiple compressors are running, one should shut down if evaporator LWT is lower than the Stage
Down Temperature and the Stage Down Delay is not active.
All running compressors should shut down when the evaporator LWT is lower than the Shut Down
Temperature.
Stage Up Delay
A minimum amount of time, defined by the Stage Up Delay set point, should pass between increases in the
capacity stage. This delay should only apply when at least one compressor is running. If the first compressor
starts and quickly shuts off for some reason, another compressor may start without this minimum time
passing.
Stage Down Delay

A minimum amount of time, defined by the Stage Down Delay set point, should pass between decreases in
the capacity stage. This delay should not apply when the LWT drops below the Shut Down Temperature
(unit should immediately shut down).
Compressor Staging in Ice Mode

The first compressor on the unit should be started when evaporator LWT is higher than the Startup
Temperature.
Additional compressors should be started as quickly as possible with respect to the Stage Up Delay.
The unit should shut down when evaporator LWT is less than the LWT target.
Stage Up Delay
A fixed stage up delay of one minute between compressor starts should be used in this mode.
Staging Sequence
This section defines which compressor is the next one to start or stop. In general, compressors with fewer
starts will normally start first, and compressors with more run hours will normally stop first.
If possible circuits will be balanced in stage. If a circuit is unavailable for any reason, the other circuit shall
be allowed to stage all compressors on. When staging down, one compressor on each circuit shall be left on
until each circuit has only one compressor running.
Next To Start
If both circuits have an equal number of compressors running or a circuit has no compressors available to
start:
• -the available compressor with the least starts will be next to start

• -if starts are equal, the one with the least run hours will be next to start
• -if run hours are equal, the lowest numbered one will be next to start
If the circuits have an unequal number of compressors running, the next compressor to start will be on the
circuit with the least compressors running if it has at least one compressor available to start. Within that
circuit:
• -the available compressor with the least starts will be next to start
• -if starts are equal, the one with the least run hours will be next to start
• -if run hours are equal, the lowest numbered one will be next to start
Next to Stop
If both circuits have an equal number of compressors running:
• -the running compressor with the most run hours will be next to stop
• -if run hours are equal, the one with the least starts will be next to stop
• -if starts are equal, the lowest numbered one will be next to stop
If the circuits have an unequal number of compressors running, the next compressor to stop will be on the
circuit with the most compressors running. Within that circuit:
• -the running compressor with the most run hours will be next to stop
• -if run hours are equal, the one with the least starts will be next to stop
• -if starts are equal, the lowest numbered one will be next to stop
Unit Capacity Overrides

Unit capacity limits can be used to limit total unit capacity in Cool mode only. Multiple limits may be active at any time,
and the lowest limit is always used in the unit capacity control.
Demand Limit
The maximum unit capacity can be limited by a 4 to 20 mA signal on the Demand Limit analog input. This
function is only enabled if the Demand Limit set point is set to ON. The maximum unit capacity stage is
determined as shown in the following tables:
Four Compressors:
Demand Limit Signal (%) Demand Limit (mA) Stage Limit
Limit ≥ 75% Limit ≥ 16 mA 1
75% > Limit ≥ 50% 16 mA > Limit ≥ 12 mA 2
50% > Limit ≥ 25% 12 mA > Limit ≥ 8 mA 3
25% > Limit 8 mA > Limit 4
Six Compressors:
Demand Limit Signal (%) Demand Limit (mA) Stage Limit
Limit ≥ 83.3% Limit ≥ 17.3 mA 1
83.3% > Limit ≥ 66.7% 17.3 mA > Limit ≥ 14.7 mA 2
66.7% > Limit ≥ 50% 14.7 mA > Limit ≥ 12mA 3
50% > Limit ≥ 33.3% 12 mA > Limit ≥ 9.3 mA 4
33.3% > Limit ≥ 16.7% 9.3 mA > Limit ≥ 6.7 mA 5
16.7% > Limit 6.7 mA > Limit 6
Network Limit
The maximum unit capacity can be limited by a network signal. This function is only enabled if the control
source is set to network. The maximum unit capacity stage is based on the network limit value received from
the BAS, and is determined as shown in the following tables:
Four compressors:

Network Limit Stage Limit
Limit ≥ 100% 4
100% > Limit ≥ 75% 3
75% > Limit ≥ 50% 2
50% > Limit 1
Six compressors:
Network Limit Stage Limit
Limit ≥ 100% 6
100% > Limit ≥ 83.3% 5
83.3% > Limit ≥ 66.7% 4
66.7% > Limit ≥ 50% 3
50% > Limit ≥ 33.3% 2
33.3% > Limit 1
Maximum LWT Pulldown Rate

The maximum rate at which the leaving water temperature can drop shall be limited by the Maximum
Pulldown Rate set point, only when the unit mode is Cool.
If the rate exceeds this set point, no more compressors shall be started until the pulldown rate is less than the
set point.
Running compressors will not be stopped as a result of exceeding the maximum pulldown rate.
High Ambient Limit

On units configured with single point power connections, the maximum load amps could be exceeded at high
ambient temperatures. If all compressors are running on circuit 1 or all but one compressor on circuit 1,
power connection is single point, and the outdoor air temperature OAT is greater than 46.6°C (115.9°F),
circuit 2 is limited to running all but one compressor. This limit will allow the unit to operate at higher
temperatures than 46.6°C (115.9°F).

Circuit Functions
Definitions
Refrigerant Saturated Temperature
• Refrigerant saturated temperature shall be calculated from the pressure sensor readings for each circuit.
Evaporator Approach
The evaporator approach shall be calculated for each circuit. The equation is as follows:
Evaporator Approach = LWT – Evaporator Saturated Temperature

Condenser Approach
The condenser approach shall be calculated for each circuit. The equation is as follows:
Condenser Approach = Condenser Saturated Temperature - OAT

Suction Superheat
Suction superheat shall be calculated for each circuit using the following equation:
Suction superheat = Suction Temperature – Evaporator Saturated Temperature

Pumpdown Pressure
The pressure to which a circuit will pumpdown is based on the Low Evaporator Pressure Unload set point.
The equation is as follows:
Pumpdown pressure = Low Evap Pressure Unload set point – 103KPA (15 PSI)
Circuit Control Logic
Circuit Enabling
A circuit should be enabled to start if the following conditions are true:
• Circuit switch is closed
• No circuit alarms are active
• Circuit Mode set point is set to Enable
• At least one compressor is enabled to start (according to enable setpoints)
Compressor Availability
A compressor is considered available to start if all the following are true:
• The corresponding circuit is enabled
• The corresponding circuit is not in pumpdown
• No cycle timers are active for the compressor
• No limit events are active for the corresponding circuit
• The compressor is enabled via the enable setpoints
• The compressor is not already running
Circuit States
The circuit will always be in one of four states:
Off – Circuit is not running
Preopen – Circuit is preparing to start
Run – Circuit is running
Pumpdown – Circuit is doing a normal shutdown

POWER T1
OFF PREOPEN
ON T6
T5
T4
T2
PUMPDOWN T3 RUN
T1 – Off to Preopen
• No compressors are running and any compressor on circuit is commanded to start (see unit capacity
control)
•
T2 – Preopen to Run
• 5 seconds has passed
T3 – Run to Pumpdown
• Last compressor on circuit is commanded to stop
• Unit State = Pumpdown
• Circuit switch is open
• Circuit mode is disable
• Circuit Pumpdown alarm is active
T4 – Pumpdown to Off
• Evaporator Pressure < Pumpdown Pressure Value
• Unit State = Off
• Circuit Rapid Stop alarm is active
T5 – Run to Off
• A low ambient start attempt failed
T6 – Preopen to Off
• Unit State = Pumpdown
• Circuit switch is open
• Circuit mode is disable
• Circuit Pumpdown alarm is active

for low evaporator pressure is enforced and the
Pumpdown Procedure low evaporator pressure alarm should trigger if the
Pumpdown is performed as follows: evaporator pressure drops below that limit.
• If multiple compressors are running, shut off
the appropriate compressors based on When the Low OAT Start Timer has expired, if
sequencing logic and leave only one running the evaporator pressure is greater than or equal to
the Low Evaporator Pressure Unload set point, the
• Turn off hot gas output and liquid line output
start is considered successful and normal alarm
• Keep running until evaporator pressure
and event logic is reinstated. If the evaporator
reaches the pumpdown pressure, then stop
pressure is less than the Low Evaporator Pressure
compressor
Unload set point when the Low OAT Start Timer
• If evaporator pressure does not reach expires, the start is unsuccessful and the
pumpdown pressure within two minutes, stop compressor will shutdown.
compressor
Multiple Low Ambient Start attempts are allowed.
Low Ambient Starts On the third failed Low Ambient Start attempt the
A low OAT start is initiated if the condenser Restart Alarm is triggered and the circuit will not
refrigerant saturated temperature is less than attempt to restart until the Restart alarm has been
29.5°C (85.1° F) when the first compressor starts. cleared.
Once the compressor starts the circuit is in a low
OAT start state for a time equal to the Low OAT The restart counter should be reset when either a
Start Time set point. During Low OAT Starts, the startup is successful, the Low OAT Restart alarm
freezestat logic for the low evaporator pressure is triggered, or the unit time clock shows that a
alarm as well as the low evaporator pressure hold new day has started.
and unload alarms are disabled. The absolute limit
Circuit Status
The displayed circuit status should be determined by the conditions in the following table:
Enum Status Conditions

0 Off:Ready Circuit is ready to start when needed.
Circuit is off and cannot start due to active cycle timer on all
1 Off:Cycle Timers
compressors.
Circuit is off and cannot start due to all compressors being
2 Off:All Comp Disable
disabled.
3 Off:Keypad Disable Circuit is off and cannot start due to circuit enable set point.
4 Off:Circuit Switch Circuit is off and circuit switch is off.
5 Off:Alarm Circuit is off and cannot start due to active circuit alarm.
6 Off:Test Mode Circuit is in test mode.
7 Preopen Circuit is in preopen state.
8 Run:Pumpdown Circuit is in pumpdown state.
9 Run:Normal Circuit is in run state and running normally.
10 Run:Evap Press Low Circuit is running and cannot load due to low evaporator pressure.
Circuit is running and cannot load due to high condenser
11 Run:Cond Press High
pressure.
Circuit is running and cannot add more compressors due to the
12 Run:High OAT Limit
high ambient limit on unit capacity. Applies only to circuit 2.
Compressor Control
Compressors should run only when the circuit is in a run or pumpdown state. They should not be running
when the circuit is in any other state.

Starting a Compressor
A compressor should start if it receives a start command from the unit capacity control logic.
Stopping a Compressor
A compressor should be turned off if any of the following occur:
• Unit capacity control logic commands it off
• An unload alarm occurs and the sequencing requires this compressor to be next off
• Circuit state is pumpdown and sequencing requires this compressor to be next off
Cycle Timers
A minimum time between starts of the compressor and a minimum time between shutdown and start of the
compressor shall be enforced. The time values are determined by the Start-start Timer and Stop-start Timer
setpoints.
These cycle timers should not be enforced through cycling of power to the chiller. This means that if power
is cycled, the cycle timers should not be active.
These timers may be cleared via a setting on the human machine interface (HMI).
Condenser Fan Control

Condenser fan control should stage fans as needed any time compressors are running on the circuit. All
running fans should turn off when the circuit goes to the off state.
Fan Staging
Fan staging shall accommodate anywhere from 2 to 7 fans on a circuit using up to 5 outputs for control. The
total number of fans on shall be adjusted with changes of one fan at a time. The tables below show the
outputs energized for each stage.
2 Through 4 Fans 6 Fans

Stage Fan Outputs On Fan Stage Fan Outputs On
1 1 1 1
2 1,2 2 1,2
3 1,2,3 3 1,2,3
4 1,2,3,4 4 1,2,4
5 1,2,3,4
5 Fans 6 1,2,3,4,5
Fan Stage Fan Outputs On
1 1 7 Fans
2 1,2 Fan Stage Fan Outputs On
3 1,2,3 1 1
4 1,2,4 2 1,2
5 1,2,3,4 3 1,2,3
4 1,2,4
5 1,2,3,4
6 1,2,4,5
7 1,2,3,4,5
Condenser Target
A condenser target should be selected from the setpoints based on the number of compressors on the unit and
the number of compressors running. Each stage of capacity on a circuit will use a different condensing target
set point.

A minimum condenser target should be enforced. This minimum will be calculated based on the evaporator
LWT. As the LWT varies from 7.2°C (45°F) to 32.2°C (90°F), the minimum condenser target will vary from
23.9°C (75°F) to 48.9°C (120°F).
Staging Up
The first fan should turn on when the saturated condenser temperature exceeds the condenser target. After
this, the four stage up dead bands shall be used. Stages one through four should use their respective dead
bands. Stages five through six should all use the Stage Up Dead Band 4.
When the saturated condenser temperature is above the target + the active deadband, a stage up error is
accumulated.
Stage Up Error Step = Saturated Condenser Temperature – (Target + Stage Up dead band)
The Stage Up Error Step is added to Stage Up Accumulator once every 5 seconds, only if the Saturated
Condenser Refrigerant Temperature is not falling. When Stage Up Error Accumulator is greater than 11°C
(19.8°F) another stage is added.
When a stage up occurs or the saturated condenser temperature falls back within the stage up dead band the
Stage Up Accumulator is reset to zero.
Staging Down
Four stage down dead bands shall be used. Stages one through four should use their respective dead bands.
Stages five through seven should all use Stage Down Dead Band 4.
When the saturated condenser refrigerant temperature is below the target – the active deadband, a stage
down error is accumulated.
Stage Down Error Step = (Target - Stage Down dead band) - Saturated Condenser Temperature
The Stage Down Error Step is added to Stage Down Accumulator once every 5 seconds. When the Stage
Down Error Accumulator is greater than 2.8°C (5°F) another stage of condenser fans is removed.
When a stage down occurs or the saturated temperature rises back within the Stage Down dead band the
Stage Down Error Accumulator is reset to zero.
VFD
Condenser pressure trim control is accomplished using an optional VFD on the first fan. This VFD control
should vary the fan speed to drive the saturated condenser temperature to a target value. The target value is
normally the same as the saturated condenser temperature target.
The speed should be controlled between the minimum and maximum speed setpoints.
VFD State
The VFD speed signal should always be 0 when the fan stage is 0.
When the fan stage is greater than 0, the VFD speed signal should be enabled and control the speed as
needed.
Stage Up Compensation
In order to create a smoother transition when another fan is staged on, the VFD compensates by slowing
down initially. This is accomplished by adding the new fan stage up deadband to the VFD target. The higher
target causes the VFD logic to decrease fan speed. Then, every 2 seconds, 0.1°C (0.18°F) is subtracted from
the VFD target until it is equal to the saturated condenser temperature target set point.

EXV Control
Auto Control
Any time the circuit is not in the run state, the EXV position should be 0. The EXV control state should
display that the EXV state is closed when this is the case.
While a circuit is in the run state, the EXV should go into superheat control. While in superheat control, the
EXV controls suction superheat. The suction superheat target is set by a set point. A PID function will be
used to control the superheat to the target value.
The EXV should also prevent the evaporator pressure from exceeding the Maximum Evaporator Pressure set
point. This is done by using another PID function to control evaporator pressure to the maximum evaporator
pressure.
The EXV position should be lesser position output from the two PID functions.
EXV Position Range

The following table shows the EXV range based on the number of compressors running and the total number
of fans on the unit.
Compressors Running
1 2 3
EXV Min 8% 8% -
Num Fans = 4
EXV Max 40% 60% -
EXV Min 8% 8% -
Num Fans = 6
EXV Max 60% 100% -
EXV Min 8% 8% 8%
Num Fans = 8
EXV Max 40% 55% 70%
EXV Min 8% 8% 8%
Num Fans ≥ 10
EXV Max 30% 40% 50%
On units equipped with 10 or more condenser fans (shell and tube type evaporator):
When staging down a compressor the maximum position is reduced by 10% for one minute to
prevent liquid from getting to compressors. After this initial one minute delay, the valve’s maximum
is allowed to return to its normal value at a rate of 0.1% every six seconds. This offset to the
maximum position should not occur if the stage down is due to a low pressure unload.
In addition, the expansion valve maximum position may be increased if after two minutes both the
suction superheat is greater than 7.2°C (13°F) and the expansion valve has been within 5% of its
current maximum position. The maximum should increase at a rate of 0.1% every six seconds up to a
total of an additional 10%. This offset to the maximum position should be reset when the EXV is no
longer in the Superheat Control state or a compressor on the circuit stages.
Manual Control
The EXV position can be set manually. Manual control can only be selected when the circuit is in the run
state. At any other time, the EXV control set point is forced to auto.

When EXV control is set to manual, the EXV position is equal to the manual EXV position setting. If set to
manual when the circuit state transitions from run to another state, the control setting is automatically set
back to auto. When in manual control, the EXV control state displayed should reflect that it is manual
control.
Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
The liquid line solenoid output should be on when the circuit state is either Pre-open or Run. This output
should be off at all other times.
Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve
This output shall be on when circuit state is Run and one compressor on the circuit is running. The output
should be off at all other times.
Capacity Overrides – Limits of Operation
The following conditions shall override automatic capacity control as described. These overrides keep the
circuit from entering a condition in which it is not designed to run.
Low Evaporator Pressure
If the Low Evaporator Pressure Hold or Low Evaporator Pressure Unload alarms are triggered, the circuit
capacity may be limited or reduced. See the Circuit Events section for details on triggering, reset, and
actions taken.
High Condenser Pressure

If the High Condenser Pressure Unload alarm is triggered, the circuit capacity may be limited or reduced.
See the Circuit Events section for details on triggering, reset, and actions taken.
Alarms
Situations may arise that require some action from the chiller or that should be logged for future reference.
Alarms are classified in the following sections per the Global Chiller Protocol Standard using the
Fault/Problem/Warning scheme.
When any Unit Fault Alarm is active, the alarm digital output should be turned on. If no Unit Fault Alarm is
active, but any Circuit Fault Alarm is active, the alarm digital output should alternate five seconds on and
five seconds off continuously.
All alarms appear in the active alarm list while active. All alarms are added to the alarm log when triggered
and when cleared.

Unit Fault Alarms
PVM/GFP Fault
Trigger: Power Configuration = Single Point and PVM/GFP Input #1 is open.
Action Taken: Rapid stop all circuits
Reset: Auto reset when input is closed for at least 5 seconds or if Power Configuration = Multi Point.
Evaporator Flow Loss
Trigger:
1: Evaporator Pump State = Run AND Evaporator Flow Digital Input = No Flow for time > Flow
Proof Set Point AND at least one compressor running
2: Evaporator Pump State = Start for time greater than Recirc Timeout Set Point and all pumps have
been tried and Evaporator Flow Digital Input = No Flow
Action Taken: Rapid stop all circuits
Reset:
This alarm can be cleared at any time manually via the keypad or via the BAS clear alarm command.
If active via trigger condition 1:
When the alarm occurs due to this trigger, it can auto reset the first two times each day with the third
occurrence being manual reset.
For the auto reset occurrences, the alarm will reset automatically when the evaporator state is Run
again. This means the alarm stays active while the unit waits for flow, then it goes through the
recirculation process after flow is detected. Once the recirculation is complete, the evaporator goes to
the Run state which will clear the alarm. After three occurrences, the count of occurrences is reset and
the cycle starts over if the manual reset flow loss alarm is cleared.
If active via trigger condition 2:
If the flow loss alarm has occurred due to this trigger, it is always a manual reset alarm.
Evaporator Water Freeze Protect
Trigger: Evaporator LWT drops to evaporator freeze protect set point for at least the recirculation
time and LWT sensor fault is not active.
If the unit is on-

Action Taken: Rapid stop all circuits and pump will run continue to run for 15 minutes
If the unit is off-

Action Taken: Start pumps and if the temperature rises above the setpoint before the recirculation
time, then no alarm. If the temperature does not rise, then alarm triggers.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad, but only if the alarm trigger conditions no
longer exist.
Evaporator LWT Sensor Fault

Trigger: Sensor shorted or open

Action Taken: Normal stop all circuits
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or BAS command, but only if the sensor is
back in range.
Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Fault
Action Taken: Normal stop of all circuits.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or via BAS command if the sensor is back
in range.
External Alarm
Trigger: External Alarm/Event opens for at least 5 seconds and external fault input is configured as an
alarm.
Action Taken: Rapid stop of all circuits.
Reset: Auto clear when digital input is closed.

Compressor Module 1 Comm Failure
Trigger: Communication with the I/O extension module has failed.
Action Taken: Rapid stop of circuit 1.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or BAS command when communication
between main controller and the extension module is working for 5 seconds.
Compressor Module 2 Comm Failure
Trigger: Communication with the I/O extension module has failed.
between main controller and the extension module is working for 5 seconds.
EXV Module 1 Comm Failure
Trigger: Expansion Valve Type = Electronic and communication with the I/O extension module has
failed.
between main controller and the extension module is working for 5 seconds or Expansion Valve Type
= Thermal.
EXV Module 2 Comm Failure
Trigger: Expansion Valve Type = Electronic and communication with the I/O extension module has
failed.

between main controller and the extension module is working for 5 seconds or Expansion Valve Type
= Thermal.
Unit Problem Alarms

Low Ambient Lockout (No longer an alarm from version 251699201 on)
Trigger: The OAT drops below the low ambient lockout set point AND the OAT sensor fault is not
active.
Action Taken: Normal shutdown of all circuits.
Reset: The lockout should clear when OAT rises to the lockout set point plus 2.8°C (5°F).
Evaporator Pump #1 Failure

Trigger: Unit is configured with primary and backup pumps, pump #1 is running, and the pump
control logic switches to pump #2.
Action Taken: Backup pump is used.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or BAS command
Evaporator Pump #2 Failure

Trigger: Unit is configured with primary and backup pumps, pump #2 is running, and the pump
control logic switches to pump #1.
Action Taken: Backup pump is used.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or BAS command
Unit Warning Alarms

External Event
Trigger: External Alarm/Event input is open for at least 5 seconds and external fault is configured as
an event.
Action Taken: None

.
Reset: Auto clear when digital input is closed.
Bad Demand Limit Input

Trigger: Demand limit input out of range and demand limit is enabled. For this alarm out of range is
considered to be a signal less than 3mA or more than 21mA.
Action Taken: Cannot use demand limit function.
Reset: Auto clear when demand limit disabled or demand limit input back in range for 5 seconds.

Bad LWT Reset Input
Trigger: LWT reset input out of range and LWT reset is enabled. For this alarm out of range is
considered to be a signal less than 3mA or more than 21mA.
Action Taken: Cannot use LWT reset function.
Reset: Auto clear when LWT reset is disabled or LWT reset input back in range for 5 seconds.
Evaporator EWT Sensor Fault

Action Taken: None.
Reset: Auto clear when the sensor is back in range.
Circuit Fault Alarms

PVM/GFP Fault
Trigger: Power Configuration = Multi Point and circuit PVM/GFP input is open.
Action Taken: Rapid stop circuit.
Reset: Auto reset when input is closed for at least 5 seconds or if Power Configuration = Single Point.
Low Evaporator Pressure

Trigger:
This alarm should trigger when Freeze time is exceeded, Low Ambient Start is not active, and Circuit
State = Run. It should also trigger if Evaporator Press < 137.9 KPA (20 PSI) and Circuit State = Run.
Freezestat logic allows the circuit to run for varying times at low pressures. The lower the pressure,
the shorter the time the compressor can run. This time is calculated as follows:
Freeze error = Low Evaporator Pressure Unload – Evaporator Pressure

Freeze time =
For units equipped with 10 or more condenser fans (shell and tube type evaporator):
80 – freeze error, limited to a range of 40 to 80 seconds
For all other configurations (plate to plate type evaporator):
60 – freeze error, limited to a range of 20 to 60 seconds
When the evaporator pressure goes below the Low Evaporator Pressure Unload set point, a timer
starts. If this timer exceeds the freeze time, then a freezestat trip occurs. If the evaporator pressure
rises to the unload set point or higher, and the freeze time has not been exceeded, the timer will reset.
The alarm cannot trigger if the evaporator pressure sensor fault is active.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad if the evaporator pressure is above 137.9
KPA (20 PSI).

High Condenser Pressure
Trigger: Condenser Pressure > High Condenser Pressure set point
Action Taken: Rapid stop circuit
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the controller keypad
Mechanical High Pressure Switch

Trigger: Mechanical High Pressure switch input is open, Motor Protection input is closed, and power
up start delay is not active.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the controller keypad if the MHP switch input is
closed.
Motor Protection Fault

Trigger: Motor Protection input is open and power up start delay is not active.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the controller keypad if the input is closed.
Low OAT Restart Fault

Trigger: Circuit has failed three low OAT start attempts.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or via BAS command.
No Pressure Change After Start

Trigger: After start of compressor, at least a 7 KPA (1 PSI) drop in evaporator pressure OR 35 KPA
(5.1 PSI) increase in condenser pressure has not occurred after 30 seconds. The actual alarm will not
be triggered until the second occurrence.
Reset: This alarm can be cleared manually via the keypad or via BAS command.
Evaporator Pressure Sensor Fault

Trigger: Sensor shorted or open.
back in range.
Condenser Pressure Sensor Fault

Trigger: Sensor shorted or open.

back in range.
Suction Temperature Sensor Fault

Trigger: Sensor shorted or open and Expansion Valve Type = Electronic.
Action Taken: Normal shutdown of circuit.
back in range.
Circuit Events
Low Evaporator Pressure - Hold
Trigger:
This event is triggered if all of the following are true:
• circuit state = Run
• evaporator pressure <= Low Evaporator Pressure - Hold set point
• circuit is not currently in a low OAT start
• it has been at least 30 seconds since a compressor has started on the circuit.
Action Taken: Inhibit starting of additional compressors on the circuit.
Reset: While still running, the event will be reset if evaporator pressure > Low Evaporator Pressure
Hold SP + 90 KPA(13 PSI). The event is also reset if the circuit is no longer in the run state.
Low Evaporator Pressure - Unload

Trigger:
• more than one compressor is running on the circuit
• evaporator pressure <= Low Evaporator Pressure - Unload set point for a time greater than
half of the current freezestat time
On units equipped with 6 compressors, electronic expansion valves, and 10 or more fans, when each
compressors starts, there should be a 2 minute window during which the evaporator pressure must
drop an additional 27 KPA (3.9 PSI) to trigger the alarm. After this 2 minute window, the trigger point
should return to normal.
Action Taken: Stage off one compressor on the circuit every 10 seconds, except the last one.

High Condenser Pressure - Unload
Trigger:
• condenser pressure > High Condenser Pressure – Unload set point
Action Taken: Stage off one compressor on the circuit every 10 seconds while condenser pressure is
higher than the unload set point, except the last one. Inhibit staging more compressors on until the
condition resets.
Reset: While still running, the event will be reset if condenser pressure <= High Condenser Pressure
Unload SP – 862 KPA(125 PSI). The event is also reset if the circuit is no longer in the run state.
Circuit Warning Alarms

Failed Pumpdown
Trigger: Circuit state = pumpdown for longer than 2 minutes
Action Taken: Rapid stop circuit
Reset: N/A.
Events
Situations may arise that require some action from the chiller or that should be logged for future
reference, but aren’t severe enough to track as alarms. These events are stored in a log separate from
alarms. This log shows the time and date of the latest occurrence, the count of occurrences for the
current day, and the count of occurrences for each of the previous 7 days.
Unit Events
Unit Power Restore
Trigger: Unit controller is powered up.
Action Taken: none.
Reset: none.
Circuit Events
Low Evaporator Pressure - Hold
Trigger:
• evaporator pressure <= Low Evaporator Pressure - Hold set point

Action Taken: Inhibit starting of additional compressors on the circuit.
Low Evaporator Pressure - Unload

Trigger:
• evaporator pressure <= Low Evaporator Pressure - Unload set point for a time greater than
half of the current freezestat time
• it has been at least 30 seconds since a compressor has started on the circuit
On units equipped with 6 compressors, electronic expansion valves, and 10 or more fans, when each
compressors starts, there should be a 2 minute window during which the evaporator pressure must
drop an additional 27 KPA (3.9 PSI) to trigger the alarm. After this 2 minute window, the trigger point
should return to normal.
Action Taken: Stage off one compressor on the circuit every 10 seconds while evaporator pressure is
less than the unload set point, except the last one.
High Condenser Pressure - Unload

Trigger:
• condenser pressure > High Condenser Pressure – Unload set point
Action Taken: Stage off one compressor on the circuit every 10 seconds while condenser pressure is
higher than the unload set point, except the last one. Inhibit staging more compressors on until the
condition resets.
Reset: While still running, the event will be reset if condenser pressure <= High Condenser Pressure
Unload SP – 862 KPA(125 PSI). The event is also reset if the circuit is no longer in the run state.

Alarm Logs
NOTE: refer to Figure 3 on the following page for controller components. Press the alarm button on
the controller to go to the alarm section. Three alarm sub-sections will appear. Turn the navigating
wheel to highlight among them and press the wheel to select.
1. Active Alarms
When an alarm or event occurs, it appears in the active alarm list. The active alarm list holds a record
of all active alarms not yet cleared and includes the date and time each occurred. When cleared, the
alarm transfers to the Alarm Log that contains an alarm history with time/date stamp. A (+) before an
alarm indicates that it is active, a (-) indicates a cleared alarm. The Active Alarm list is only limited by
the number of alarms since any given alarm cannot appear twice.
2. Alarm Log
An alarm log stores the last 50 occurrences or resets that occur. When an alarm or event occurs, it is
put into the first slot in the alarm log and all others are moved down one, dropping the last entry. The
date and time the alarm occurred are stored in the alarm log.
3. Event Log
An Event Log similar to the Alarm Log stores the last 50 event occurrences. Each Event Log entry
includes an event description and a time and date stamp for the event occurrence plus the count of the
event occurrences on the current day and for each of the last seven days. Events do not appear in the
Active Alarm list.
Clearing Alarms
Active alarms can be cleared through the keypad/display or a BAS network. Alarms are automatically
cleared when controller power is cycled. Alarms are cleared only if the conditions required to initiate
the alarm no longer exist. All alarms and groups of alarms can be cleared via the keypad or network
via LON using nviClearAlarms and via BACnet using the ClearAlarms object.
To use the keypad, follow the Alarm links to the Alarms screen, which will show Active Alarms and
Alarm Log. Select Active Alarm and press the wheel to view the Alarm List (list of current active
alarms). They are in order of occurrence with the most recent on top. The second line on the screen
shows Alm Cnt (number of alarms currently active) and the status of the alarm clear function. Off
indicates that the Clear function is off and the alarm is not cleared. Press the wheel to go to the edit
mode. The Alm Clr (alarm clear) parameter will be highlighted with OFF showing. To clear all alarms,
rotate the wheel to select ON and enter it by pressing the wheel.
An active password is not necessary to clear alarms.
If the problem(s) causing the alarm have been corrected, the alarms will be cleared, disappear from the
Active Alarm list and be posted in the Alarm Log. If not corrected, the On will immediately change
back to OFF and the unit will remain in the alarm condition.

Using the Controller
Figure 3, Unit Controller
Alarm Button
Menu Button
Navigation Wheel
Return Button
Display
The keypad/display consists of a 5-line by 22-character display, three buttons (keys) and a “push and
roll” navigation wheel. There is an Alarm Button, Menu (Home) Button, and a Back Button. The
wheel is used to navigate between lines on a screen (page) and to increase and decrease changeable
values when editing. Pushing the wheel acts as an Enter Button and will jump from a link to the next
set of parameters.
Figure 4, Typical Screen
♦6 View/Set Unit 3
Status/Settings >
Set Up >
Temperature >
Date/Time/Schedule >
Generally, each line on the display contains a menu title, a parameter (such as a value or a setpoint),
or a link (which will have an arrow in the right of the line) to a further menu.
The first line visible on each display includes the menu title and the line number to which the cursor
is currently “pointing”, in the above case 3, Temperature.
The left most position of the title line includes an “up” arrow ▲ to indicate there are lines
(parameters) “above” the currently displayed line; and/or a “down” arrow ▼ to indicate there are
lines (parameters) “below” the currently displayed items or an “up/down” arrow ♦ to indicate there
are lines “above and below” the currently displayed line. The selected line is highlighted.
Each line on a screen can contain status-only information or include changeable data fields
(setpoints).

When the cursor is on a line the highlights will look like this:
If line contains a changeable value> Evaporator Delta T= 10.0F
If the line contains status-only information> Unit Status= Run
Or a line in a menu may be a link to further menus. This is often referred to as a jump line,
meaning pushing the navigation wheel will cause a “jump” to a new menu. An arrow (>)is
displayed to the far right of the line to indicate it is a “jump” line and the entire line is
highlighted when the cursor is on that line.
NOTE - Only menus and items that are applicable to the specific unit configuration are displayed.
This manual includes information relative to the operator level of parameters; data and setpoints
necessary for the every day operation of the chiller. There are more extensive menus available
for the use of service technicians.
Navigating
When power is applied to the control circuit, the controller screen will be active and display the Home
screen, which can also be accessed by pressing the Menu Button The navigating wheel is the only
navigating device necessary, although the MENU, ALARM, and BACK buttons can provide shortcuts as
explained later.
Passwords
Enter passwords from the Main Menu:
Enter Password, links to the Entry screen, which is an editable screen So pressing the wheel goes
to the edit mode where the password (5321) can be entered. The first (*) will be highlighted,
rotate the wheel clockwise to the first number and set it by pressing the wheel. Repeat for the
remaining three numbers.
The password will time out after 10 minutes, and is cancelled if a new password is entered or the
control powers down.
Figure 5, Password Menu

Main Menu
Enter Password >
Unit Status
Off: Unit Sw
ACTIVE SETPT 44.6°F
Figure 6, Password Entry Page

Enter Password
Enter PW ****
Entering an invalid password has the same effect as not entering a password.
Once a valid password has been entered, the controller allows further changes and access without
requiring the user to enter a password until either the password timer expires or a different password is
entered.

Navigation Mode
When the navigation wheel is turned clockwise, the cursor moves to the next line (down) on the
page. When the wheel is turned counter-clockwise the cursor moves to the previous line (up) on
the page. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the cursor moves. Pushing the wheel acts as an
“Enter” button.
Three types of lines exist:
• Menu title, displayed in the first line as in Figure 6.
• Link (also called Jump) having an arrow ( > ) in the right of the line and used to link to
the next menu.
• Parameters with a value or adjustable setpoint.
For example, “Time Until Restart” jumps from level 1 to level 2 and stops there.
When the Back Button is pressed the display reverts back to the previously displayed page. If the
Back button is repeatedly pressed the display continues to revert one page back along the current
navigation path until the “main menu” is reached.
When the Menu (Home) Button is pressed the display reverts to the “main page.”
When the Alarm Button is depressed, the Alarm Lists menu is displayed.
Edit Mode
The Editing Mode is entered by pressing the navigation wheel while the cursor is pointing to a
line containing an editable field. Turning the wheel clockwise while the editable field is
highlighted causes the value to be increased. Turning the wheel counter-clockwise while the
editable field is highlighted causes the value to be decreased. The faster the wheel is turned the
faster the value is increased or decreased. Pressing the wheel again cause the new value to be
saved and the keypad/display to leave the edit mode and return to the navigation mode.
A parameter with an “R” is read only; it is giving a value or description of a condition. An “R/W”
indicates a read and/or write opportunity; a value can be read or changed (providing the proper
password has been entered).
Example 1: Check Status, for example-is the unit being controlled locally or by an external network?
We are looking for the Unit Control Source. Since this is a unit status parameter, start at Main Menu and
select View/Set Unit. There will be an arrow at the right side of the box, indicating that a jump to the next
level is required. Press the wheel to execute the jump.
You will arrive at the Status/Settings link. There is an arrow indicating that this line is a link to a further
menu. Press the wheel again to jump to the next menu, Unit Status/Settings.
Rotate the wheel to scroll down to Control Source and read the result.
Example 2; Change a Setpoint, the chilled water setpoint for example. This parameter is designated as
Cool LWT 1 setpoint and is a unit parameter. From the Main Menu select View/Set Unit. The arrow
indicated that this is link to a further menu.
Press the wheel and jump to the next menu View/Set Unit and use the wheel to scroll down to
Temperatures. This again has an arrow and is a link to a further menu. Press the wheel and jump to the
Temperatures menu, which contains temperatures values and setpoints. The first line is Evap LWT, rotate
wheel until Cool LWT 1 is highlighted. Press the wheel to enter edit mode. Rotate wheel until new
setpoint is reached, then press wheel to accept the new value and exit edit mode.

Example 3; Clear an Alarm, from the Main Menu scroll down to the Alarms line. Note the arrow
indicating this line is a link. Press the wheel to jump to the next menu Alarms There are two lines here;
Alarm Active and Alarm Log. Alarms are cleared from the Active Alarm link. Press the wheel to jump
to the next screen. With the first line highlighted, press the wheel to enter edit mode. Rotate wheel
until AlmClr is set to On, then press wheel to clear the alarms.
Menus
Screens with titles and contents are shown in leftmost column of Table 13. An identifier for each
screen is also found in this column. Screen contents can include:
• Data
• Setpoints
• Links to other screens
Note that some parameters or links may not be visible due to the unit configuration.
Link visibility as well as read and write access to parameters is defined for each password level:
• R = readable/visible
• R/W = readable/writeable
• blank = not visible/accessible
Screen Navigational Links:

For each link on a screen, the linked screen is indicated in the rightmost column.
Example; the Enter Password screen links to screen U-2
For each screen, the screen(s) from which you can navigate to it is also shown on the same row as the
screen identifier.
Example: Enter Password in screen U-2 is linked from Screen U-1
For most circuit or compressor level parameters, there is a link to a screen that shows the values for all
circuits/compressors which is indicated in the 'Links to screen' column as *.
For many of the circuit level screens, only one screen will be shown in this document. The same set of
screens exists for each circuit and compressor. These screens are identified with 'Cx' and Cmpx'
identifiers. 'U' designates a unit related screen.
Table 13, Menu Screens
NOTE: Bold entries indicate screens with links to other screens.
Screen U-1
Main Menu No password Operator Links to screen
Enter Password R R U-2
Quick Menu R U-3
View/Set Unit R U-4
View/Set Circuit R U-5
Unit Status R R
Active Setpoint R R
Evap Leaving Water Temp R R
Unit Capacity R R
Unit Mode R R
Time Until Restart R R U-6
Alarms R R U-7
Scheduled Maintenance R R U-8
Review Operation U-9
Manual Control U-10
Commission Unit U-11
About Chiller R U-12

Screen U-2 From Screen U-1
Enter Password No password Operator Links to screen
Enter PW R/W R/W

Quick Menu No password Operator Links to screen
Unit Status R
Active Setpoint R
Evap Leaving Water Temp R
Evap Entering Water Temp R
Unit Capacity R
Network Limit Value R
Demand Limit Value R
Unit Mode R
Control Source R/W

View/Set Unit No password Operator Links to screen
Status/Settings R U-13
Set-Up R U-14
Temperatures R U-15
Date/Time/Schedules R U-16
Power Conservation R U-17
LON Setup R U-18
BACnet IP Setup R U-19
BACnet MSTP Setup R U-20
Modbus Setup R U-21
AWM Setup R U-22
Configuration U-23
Ctrlr IP Setup R U-24
Design Conditions R U-25
Alarm Limits R U-26
Calibrate Sensors U-27
Settings Change History U-28
Menu Password R U-29

View/Set Circuit No password Operator Links to screen
Circuit #1 R Cx-1
Circuit #2 R Cx-1

Time Until Restart No password Operator Links to screen
Compressor 1 Cycle Time
Remaining R R
Remaining R R
Remaining R R
Continued next page.

Time Until Restart No password Operator Links to screen
Remaining R R
Remaining R R
Remaining R R
Clear Cycle Timers

Alarms No password Operator Links to screen
Alarm Active R R U-30
Alarm Log R R U-31
Event Log R U-32
Screen U-8 From Screen U-1, U-9, U-11

Scheduled Maintenance No password Operator Links to screen
Next Maintenance Month/Year R R/W
Service Support Reference R R

Review Operation No password Operator Links to screen
Alarm Active U-30
Alarm Log U-31
Unit Status/Settings U-33
Circuit 1 Status/Settings Cx-2
Circuit 2 Status/Settings Cx-2
Scheduled Maintenance U-8
U-10 From Screen U-1

Manual Control No password Operator Links to screen
Unit U-34
Circuit 1 Cx-3
Circuit 2 Cx-3

Commission Unit No password Operator Links to screen
About This Chiller U-12
Configuration U-23
Set-Up U-14
Date/Time/Schedules U-16
Power Conservation U-17
Alarm Limits U-26
Calibrate Unit Sensors U-27
Calibrate Circuit Sensors U-35
LON Setup U-18
BACnet IP Setup U-19
BACnet MSTP Setup U-20

Commission Unit No password Operator Links to screen
Modbus Setup U-21
AWM Setup U-22
Ctrlr IP Setup U-24
Alarm Active U-30
Alarm Log U-31
Scheduled Maintenance U-8
Manual Control Unit U-34
Manual Control Circuit 1 Cx-3
Manual Control Circuit 2 Cx-3
Screen U-12 From Screen U-1, U11

About Chiller No password Operator Links to screen
Model Number R R
G. O. Number R R
Unit Serial Number R R
BSP Version R R
Application Version R R
HMI GUID R R
OBH GUID R R

Status/Settings No password Operator Links to screen
Unit Status R
Next Compressor On R
Next Compressor Off R
Chiller Enable R
Control Source R
Chiller Enable Setpoint – Network R
Chiller Mode Setpoint – Network R
Cool Setpoint – Network R
Capacity Limit Setpoint – Network R
Stage Up Delay Remaining R
Stage Down Delay Remaining R
Clear Stage Delays R/W
Ice Setpoint – Network R
Ice Cycle Time Remaining R
Clear Ice Cycle Delay
Evap Pump Control
Evap Recirculate Timer
Evap Nominal Delta T
Evap Pump 1 Run Hours R
Evap Pump 2 Run Hours R
Remote Service Enable R

Screen U-14 From Screen U-4, U11
Set-Up No password Operator Links to screen
Available Modes R
Start Up DT R
Shut Down DT R
Max Pulldown Rate R
Stage Up Delay R
Stage Down Delay R
Start To Start Delay
Stop To Start Delay
Ice Cycle Delay R
External Fault Config
Display Units

Temperatures No password Operator Links to screen
Evap Leaving Water Temp R
Evap Entering Water Temp R
Evaporator Delta T R
Active Set Point R
Start Up Temperature R
Shut Down Temperature R
Stage Up Temperature R
Stage Down Temperature R
Pulldown Rate
Outside Air Temperature R
Cool LWT Setpoint 1 R/W
Cool LWT Setpoint 2 R/W
Ice LWT Setpoint R/W
Screen U-16 From Screen U-4, U-11

Date/Time/Schedules No password Operator Links to screen
Actual Time R/W
Actual Date R/W
UTC Difference R/W
DLS Enable R/W
DLS Start Month R/W
DLS Start Week R/W
DLS End Month R/W
DLS End Week R/W

Power Conservation No password Operator Links to screen
Unit Capacity R
Demand Limit Enable R/W
Demand Limit Value R
LWT Reset Enable R/W

LON Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Neuron ID R
Max Send Time R/W
Min Send Time R/W
Receive Heartbeat R/W
LON BSP R
LON App Version R
BACnet IP Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes R/W
Name R/W
Dev Instance R/W
UDP Port R/W
DHCP R/W
Actual IP Address R
Actual Mask R
Actual Gateway R
Given IP Address R/W
Given Mask R/W
Given Gateway R/W
Unit Support R/W
NC Dev 1 R/W
NC Dev 2 R/W
BACnet BSP R

BACnet MSTP Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes R/W
Name R/W
Dev Instance R/W
MSTP Address R/W
Baud Rate R/W
Max Master R/W
Max Info Frm R/W
Unit Support R/W
Term Resistor R/W
NC Dev 1 R/W
NC Dev 2 R/W
BACnet BSP R

Modbus Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes R/W
Address R/W
Parity R/W
Two Stop Bits R/W
Baud Rate R/W
Load Resistor R/W

Modbus Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Response Delay R/W
Comm LED Time Out R/W
Modbus BSP R

AWM Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes R/W
DHCP R/W
Actual IP Address R
Actual Mask R
Actual Gateway R
Given Mask R/W
Given Gateway R/W
AWM BSP R

Configuration No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes
Number Of Compressors
Expansion Valve Type
Number Of Fans
Fan VFD Enable
Power Configuration
Comm Module 1 Type
Comm Module 2 Type
Comm Module 3 Type

Ctrlr IP Setup No password Operator Links to screen
Apply Changes R/W
DHCP R/W
Actual IP Address R
Actual Mask R
Actual Gateway R
Given Mask R/W
Given Gateway R/W

Design Conditions No password Operator Links to screen
Evap Entering Water Temp @
Design R
Evap Leaving Water Temp @
Design R
Evap Design Water Flow
Evap Design Approach *
Cond Design Ambient

Cond Design Approach *
Unit Full Load Efficiency
Unit Integrated Part Load Value
Rated Capacity R

Alarm Limits No password Operator Links to screen
Low Pressure Hold Setpoint R
Low Pressure Unload Setpoint R
High Pressure Unload Setpoint
High Pressure Shutdown Setpoint
Low Ambient Start Time
Evaporator Water Freeze
Evaporator Flow Proof
Evap Recirculate Timeout

Calibrate Sensors No password Operator Links to screen
Evap Leaving Water Temp
Evap LWT Offset
Evap Entering Water Temp
Evap EWT Offset
Outside Air Temp
OAT Offset

Settings Change History No password Operator Links to screen
Change 1
Time/Date 1
Change 2
Time/Date 2
Change 3
Time/Date 3
Change 4
Time/Date 4
Change 5
Time/Date 5
Change 6
Time/Date 6

Menu Password No password Operator Links to screen
Password Disable R

Alarm Active No password Operator Links to screen
Active Count R R
Alarm Clear R/W R/W
Active Alarm 1 R R
… R R
Active Alarm n R R

Alarm Log No password Operator Links to screen
Log Count R R
Log Clear R R
Active Alarm 1 R R
… R R
Active Alarm n R R

Event Log No password Operator Links to screen
Unit Power Restore R U-36
Circuit #1 R U-37
Circuit #2 R U-38

Unit Status/Settings No password Operator Links to screen
Actual Time
Actual Date
Unit Status
Unit Mode
Unit Capacity
Active Set Point
Pulldown Rate
Outside Air Temperature
Unit Manual Control No password Operator Links to screen
Test Unit Alarm Out
Test Evap Pump 1 Out
Test Evap Pump 2 Out
Input/Output Values
Unit Switch Input State
PVM Input State
Evaporator Flow Switch State
Remote Switch Input State
External Alarm Input State
Double Set Point Input State
Evaporator LWT Input Resistance
Evaporator EWT Input Resistance
OAT Input Resistance

Unit Manual Control No password Operator Links to screen
LWT Reset Signal Current
Demand Limit Signal Current
Unit Alarm Output State
Evaporator Pump 1 Output State
Evaporator Pump 2 Output State

Calibrate Circuit Sensors No password Operator Links to screen
Circuit #1 Cx-8
Circuit #2 Cx-8

Unit Power Restore Event Log No password Operator Links to screen
Day Selection R/W
Count R
Last Occurrence R

Circuit 1 Event Log No password Operator Links to screen
Event Selection R/W
Day Selection R/W
Count R
Last Occurrence R

Circuit 1 Event Log No password Operator Links to screen
Event Selection R/W
Day Selection R/W
Count R
Last Occurrence R
Screen Cx-1 From Screen U-5

View/Set Cirx No password Operator Links to screen
Data Cx-4
Status/Settings R Cx-5
Comp 1/2 R Cmpx-1
Comp 3/4 R Cmpx-1
Comp 5/6 R Cmpx-1
Condenser Cx-6
EXV Cx-7
Calibrate Sensors Cx-8

Circuit x Status/Settings No password Operator Links to screen
Circuit Status *
Circuit Mode *
Circuit Capacity *

Circuit x Status/Settings No password Operator Links to screen
Evap Approach *
Evap Approach @ Design *
Evaporator Pressure *
Evaporator Saturated Temperature *
Condenser Pressure *
Condenser Saturated Temperature *
Suction Temperature *
Suction Superheat *
Compressor 1/2
Run Hours *
Number Of Starts *
Last Compressor Start *
Last Compressor Stop *
Compressor 3/4
Run Hours *
Number Of Starts *
Compressor 5/6
Run Hours *
Number Of Starts *
Condenser
Number of Fans Running *
Stage Up Error *
Stage Down Error *
Condenser Target *
VFD Target *
VFD Speed *
EXV
EXV State *
EXV Position *
Superheat Target *
Suction Superheat *
EXV Control Mode *
Screen Cx-3 From Screen U-10, U-11

Circuit x Manual Control No password Operator Links to screen
Test Comp 1/2 Output
Test Liquid Line Output
Test Hot Gas Output
Test EXV Position
Test Fan Output 1

Screen Cx-3 From Screen U-10, U-11
Circuit x Manual Control No password Operator Links to screen
Test Fan Output 2
Test Fan Output 3
Test Fan Output 4
Test Fan Output 5
Test Fan VFD Speed
Input/Output Values
Circuit Switch Input State
MHP Switch Input State
Motor Protector Input State
PVM/GFP Input State
Evaporator Pressure Input Voltage
Condenser Pressure Input Voltage
Suction Temp Input Resistance
Compressor 1/2 Output State
Liquid Line Solenoid Output State
Hot Gas Bypass Output State
Fan Output 1 State
Fan Output 2 State
Fan Output 3 State
Fan Output 4 State
Fan Output 5 State
Fan VFD Speed
Screen Cx-4 From Screen Cx-1

Data No password Operator Links to screen
Condenser Pressure *
Saturated Evap Temperature *
Saturated Cond Temperature *
Suction Temperature *
Suction Superheat *
Evaporator Approach *
Evaporator Design Approach *
Condenser Approach *
Condenser Design Approach *
EXV Position *

Status/Settings Cirx No password Operator Links to screen
Circuit Status R *
Circuit Mode R *
Circuit Capacity R *

Condenser No password Operator Links to screen
Number of Fans Running *
Number of Fans *
Stage Up Error *
Stage Down Error *
Condenser Sat Temp *
Condenser Target *
VFD Target *
VFD Speed *
Stage On Dead Band 1 *
Stage Off Dead Band 1 *
VFD Max Speed *
VFD Min Speed *
Cond Target @ 100% *
Cond Target @ 67% *
Cond Target @ 50% *
Cond Target @ 33% *

EXV No password Operator Links to screen
EXV State *
Suction Superheat *
Superheat Target *
EXV Control Mode *
EXV Position *
Max Evaporator Pressure *
Screen Cx-8 From Screen Cx-1, U-35

Calibrate Sensors No password Operator Links to screen
Evaporator Pressure
Evap Pressure Offset
Condenser Pressure
Cond Pressure Offset
Suction Temp
Suction Temp Offset
Screen Cmpx-1 From Screen Cx-1
Circuit x Comp x No password Operator Links to screen
Compressor State *
Run Hours R *
Number Of Starts R *

Optional Low Ambient Fan VFD
The optional VFD fan control is used for unit operation below 35°F (2°C) down to a minimum of -10°F
(-23°C). The control looks at the saturated discharge temperature and varies the fan speed to hold the
temperature (pressure) at the “target” temperature.
Low ambient air temperature control is accomplished by using the Optional Low Ambient VFD to
control the speed of the first fan on each circuit. This VFD control uses a proportional integral function
to drive the saturated condenser temperature to a target value by changing the fan speed. The target
value is normally the same as the saturated condenser temperature target setpoint.
The fan VFD always starts when the saturated condenser temperature rises higher than the target.
What is an Inverter?
The term inverter and variable-frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable. An
electronic motor drive, for an AC motor, controls the motor’s speed by varying the frequency of the
power sent to the motor.
In general, an inverter is a device that converts DC power to AC power. The figure below shows how
the variable-frequency drive employs an internal inverter. The drive first converts incoming AC power
to DC through a rectifier bridge, creating an internal DC bus voltage. Then the inverter circuit converts
the DC back to AC again to power the motor. The special inverter can vary its output frequency and
voltage according to the desired motor speed.
Inverter Output to the Motor
! WARNING
Avoid swapping any 2 of the 3 motor lead connections, which will cause reversal of the motor
direction. In applications where reversed rotation could cause equipment damage or personnel
injury, be sure to verify direction of rotation before attempting full-speed operation. For safety
to personnel, the motor chassis ground must be connected to the ground connection at the
bottom of the inverter housing.
The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter’s output terminals.

The output terminals are uniquely labeled (to differentiate them from the
input terminals) with the designations U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This
corresponds to typical motor lead connection designations T1, T2, and
T3. The consequence of swapping any two of the three connections is the
reversal of the motor direction. This must not be done. In applications
where reversed rotation could cause equipment damage or personnel
injury, be sure to verify direction of rotation before attempting full-speed
operation. For safety to personnel, the motor chassis ground must be
connected to the ground connection at the bottom of the inverter housing.
Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked “Neutral” or “Return.” The motor
represents a balanced “Y” impedance to the inverter, so there is no need for a separate return. In other
words, each of the three “Hot” connections serves also as a return for the other connections because of
their phase relationship.
Do not to switch off power to the inverter while the motor is running (unless it is an emergency stop) to
avoid equipment damage. Also, do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring from the inverter to
the motor (except thermal disconnect).

VFD Interface (HMI)
The HMI is located in the lower left-hand

corner of the unit control panel. It is used to
view data including fault and alarm
information. No operator intervention on
this control is required for normal unit
operation.
Table 14, Display Key Functions

Table 15, Display Key Functions
No. Display Name Function
Function The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the currently displayed menu.
1
Key(F1, F2) The name of each function appears in the lower half of the display window.
• Returns to the previous display.

ESC Key
23 • Moves the cursor one space to the left.
RESET Key
• Pressing and holding this button will return to the Frequency Reference display.
• Moves the cursor to the right.

3
• Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
4 RUN Key Starts the drive in LOCAL mode.

Scrolls up to display the next item, select parameter numbers, and increment setting
5 Up Arrow Key
values.
Down Arrow Scrolls down to display the next item, select parameter numbers, and increment
6
Key setting values.
7 STOP Key Stops drive operation.
• Enters parameter values and settings.

8 ENTER Key
• Selects a menu item to move between displays
LO/RE Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and an external source
9
Selection Key (REMOTE)for the Run command and frequency reference.
10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor.
11 LO/RE Light Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode).
12 ALM LED Light Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page 65

LCD Display
Table 16, Display Data

No Name Display Content
MODE Displayed when in Mode Selection.
MONITR Displayed when in Monitor Mode.
Operation VERIFY Indicates the Verify Menu
1
Mode Menus PRMSET Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode.
A.TUNE Displayed during Auto-Tuning.
SETUP Displayed when in Setup Mode.
DriveWorksEZ
2 Function DWEZ Displayed when DriveWorksEZ is set to enable. (A1-07 = 1 or 2)
Selection
Mode Display DRV Displayed when in Drive Mode.
3
Area PRG Displayed when in Programming Mode
4 Ready Rdy Indicates the drive is ready to run.
5 Data Display — Displays specific data and operation data.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the LCD Operator
OPR
Option.
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the Analog Input of the
FrequencyRef AI
drive
erence
6 Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the MEMOBUS/Modbus
Assignment COM
CommunicationInputs of the drive
<1>
Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to an Option Unit of the
OP drive.
RP Displayed when the frequency reference is assigned to the Pulse Train Input of
RSEQ th di
Displayed when the run command is supplied from a remote source.
LO/RE Display LSEQ Displayed when the run command is supplied from the operator keypad.
7
<2> RREF Displayed when the run command is supplied from a remote source.
LREF Displayed when the run command is supplied from the operator keypad
JOG Pressing [F1} executes the Jog function.
HELP Pressing [F1] displays the Help menu.
Function Key
8 ← Pressing [F1] scrolls the cursor to the left.
1(F1)
HOME Pressing [F1] returns to the top menu (Frequency Reference).
ESC Pressing [F1] returns to the previous display
FWD Indicates forward motor operation.
9 FWD/REV
REV Indicates reverse motor operation.
FWD/REV Pressing [F2] switches between forward and reverse
Function Key 2 DATA Pressing [F2] scrolls to the next display
10
(F2) Pressing [F2] scrolls the cursor to the right
RESET Pressing [F2] resets the existing drive fault error

Table 17, Alarm Content
State Content Display
Illuminated When the drive detects an alarm or error
When an alarm occurs

Flashing When an oPE is detected
When a fault or error occurs during Auto-Tuning
Off Normal operation (no fault or alarm)
Table 18, LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indictors

LED Lit Flashing Slowly Flashing Quickly Off
When the operator When a device other
is selected for Run than the operator is
command and selected for Run
-- --
frequency command and
reference control frequency reference
(LOCAL) control (REMOTE)
• While the drive was set to
LOCAL, a Run command
was entered to the input
terminals then the drive was
switched to REMOTE.
• A Run command was
entered via the input
• During terminals while the drive was
deceleration to not in the Drive Mode.
stop • During deceleration when a
During run • When a Run Fast Stop command was During stop
command is input entered.
and frequency • The drive output is shut of by
reference is 0 Hz the Safe Disable function.
• The STOP key was pressed
while drive was running in
REMOTE.
• The drive was powered up
with b1-17 = 0 (default) while
the Run command was
active.
Examples

Table 19, Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type Drive Response
When the drive detects a fault:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is
reset.
Faults • The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop. • Some faults allow the user to select the stopping
method when the fault occurs.
• Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open.
The drive will remain inoperable until the fault is cleared.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:
• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
• The drive continues running the motor, although some alarms allow the user to select a stopping method when the alarm
Minor Faults
occurs.
and
Alarms • A multi-function contact output set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2-  = 10) closes. If the output is set to be
tripped by an alarm, the contact will not close.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of the problem to reset a minor fault or alarm.
An operation error occurs when parameter settings conflict or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option
card).When the drive detects an operation error:
Operation • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
Errors
The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to
clear the error.
Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning. When the drive detects a tuning error:
Tuning • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
Errors • Motor coasts to stop.
Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process.
Copy Function Errors occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy, read, or verify parameter
settings.
Copy • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.
Function
• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.
Errors
Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Investigate the cause of the problem (such as model
incompatibility)and try again.
Table 20 Fault Reset Methods

NOTE: When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The following
tables list the various ways to restart the drive. Remove the Run command before attempting to clear a fault. If the Run
command is present, the control will disregard any attempt to reset the fault
After the Fault Occurs Procedure
Fix the cause of the fault, restart

the drive, and reset the fault Press on the HMI.
Close then open the fault signal

Resetting via Fault Reset Digital digital input via terminal S4. S4 is
Input S4 set for “Fault Reset” as default
(H1-04 = 14)
Turn off the main power supply if the above methods do not reset the
fault. Reapply power after the HMI display has turned off.

Recommended Periodic Inspection
! WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. Before servicing or inspection equipment, disconnect power to the unit.The
internal capacitor remains charged after power is turned off. Wait at least the amount of time specified
on the drive before touching any components.
Table 21, Periodic Inspection Checklist

Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action
Inspect equipment including wiring, terminals,
resistors, capacitors, diode and IGBT for Replace damaged components.
General discoloration from overheating or deterioration.
Inspect for dirt or foreign particles Use dry air to clear away.
Inspect contactors and relays for excessive
Check for over or undervoltage
noise.
Relays and Contactors
Inspect for signs of overheating such as
Replace damaged parts.
melted or cracked insulation
Optional BAS Interface

The AGZ chiller controller is configured for stand-alone operation or integration with BAS through an
optional communication module.
The following installation manuals for optional BAS interface modules are shipped with the chiller.
They can also be found and downloaded on www.DaikinApplied.com under Product
Information > Air cooled Chillers> Scroll Type >Literature>Installation & Operation Manuals:
• IM 966-1, BACnet® IP Communication Module
• IM 967-1, BACnet® Communication Module (MS/TP)
• IM 968-1, LONWORKS Communication Module
• IM 969-2, Modbus® Communication Module
• ED 15120, Protocol Information for MicroTech III chiller, BACnet and LONWORKS
• ED 15121, Protocol Information for MicroTech III chiller, Modbus
,

Startup
Pre Start-up
The chiller must be inspected to ensure no components became loose or damaged during shipping or
installation.
Start-Up
Refer to the MicroTech III Controller section beginning on page 13 to become familiar with its
operation before starting chiller.
There should be adequate building load (at least 50 percent of the unit full load capacity) to properly
check the operation of the chiller refrigerant circuits.
Be prepared to record all operating parameters required by the “Compressorized Equipment Warranty
Form”. Return this information within 10 working days to Daikin Applied as instructed on the form to
obtain full warranty benefits.
1. Verify chilled water flow.

2. Verify remote start / stop or time clock has requested the chiller to start.
3. Set the chilled water setpoint to the required temperature. (The system water temperature must be
greater than the total of the leaving water temperature setpoint plus one-half the control band
before the MicroTech III controller will stage on cooling).
4. Set the Evap Delta T and the Start Delta T as a starting point.
5. Put both pumpdown switches (PS1 and PS2) to the ON position.
6. Put system switch (S1) to ON position.
Switch Position
Switch
ON OFF
PS1, PS2, Circuit will go through the
Circuits will operate in the
Pumpdown normal pumpdown cycle and
normal automatic mode
Switches shut off
Unit will shut off immediately
S1, Unit will operate in the
without pumping down
System Switch normal automatic mode
(emergency stop)
7. After the chiller has been operating for a period of time and has become stable, check the
following:
• Compressor oil level. (Some scroll compressors do not have oil sight glasses).
• Refrigerant sight glass for flashing
• Rotation of condenser fans
• Complete the “Compressorized Equipment Warranty Form.”
Shutdown
Temporary
1. Put both circuit switches (PS1 and PS2) to the OFF position (Pumpdown and Stop).
2. After compressors have stopped, put System Switch (SW1) to OFF (emergency stop).
3. Turn off chilled water pump. Chilled water pump to operate while compressors are pumping
down.
To start the chiller after a temporary shutdown, follow the start-up instructions.

Extended
1. Front seat (close) both condenser liquid line service valves.
2. Put both circuit switches (PS1 and PS2) to the OFF position (Pumpdown and Stop position).
3. After the compressors have stopped, put System Switch (SW1) to the OFF position (emergency
stop).
4. Front seat both refrigerant circuit discharge valves (if applicable).
5. If chilled water system is not drained, maintain power to the evaporator heater to prevent freezing.
Maintain heat tracing on the chilled water lines.
6. Drain evaporator and water piping to prevent freezing.
7. If electrical power to the unit is on, the compressor crankcase heaters will keep the liquid
refrigerant out of the compressor oil. This will minimize start-up time when putting the unit back
into service. The evaporator heater will be able to function.
8. If electrical power is off, make provisions to power the evaporator heater (if chilled water system
is not drained or filled with correct anti-freeze). Tag all opened electrical disconnect switches to
warn against start-up before the refrigerant valves are in the correct operating position.
To start the chiller after an extended shutdown, follow the prestart-up and start-up instructions.
Pre Startup Water Piping Checkout

1. Check the pump operation and vent all air from the system.
2. Circulate evaporator water, checking for proper system pressure and evaporator pressure drop.
Compare the pressure drop to the evaporator water pressure drop curve.
3. Clean all water strainers before placing the chiller into service.
Pre Startup Refrigerant Piping Checkout

1. Check all exposed brazed joints for evidence of leaks. Joints may have been damaged during
shipping or when the unit was installed.
2. Check that all refrigerant valves are either opened or closed as required for proper operation of the
chiller.
3. A thorough leak test must be done using an approved electronic leak detector. Check all valve
stem packing for leaks. Replace all refrigerant valve caps and tighten.
4. Check all refrigerant lines to insure that they will not vibrate against each other or against other
chiller components and are properly supported.
5. Look for any signs of refrigerant leaks around the condenser coils and for damage during shipping
or installation.
6. Leak detector fluid may be applied externally to refrigerant joints at the factory. Do not confuse
this residue with an oil leak.
7. Connect refrigerant service gauges to each refrigerant circuit before starting unit.
Pre Startup Electrical Check Out

! CAUTION
Electrical power must be applied to the compressor crankcase heaters 8 hours before
starting unit to drive off refrigerant from the oil and prevent damage to the unit.
1. Open all electrical disconnects and check all power wiring connections. Start at the power block
and check all connections through all components to and including the compressor terminals.
These should be checked again after 3 months of operation and at least yearly thereafter.
2. Check all control wiring by pulling on the wire at the spade connections and tighten all screw
connections. Check plug-in relays for proper seating and to insure retaining clips are installed.

3. Put System Switch (S1) to the Emergency Stop position.
4. Put both circuit #1 & #2 switches to the Pumpdown and Stop position.
5. Apply power to the unit. The panel Alarm Light will stay on until S1 is closed. Ignore the Alarm
Light for the check out period. If you have the optional Alarm Bell, you may wish to disconnect
it.
6. Check at the power block or disconnect for the proper voltage and proper voltage between phases.
Check power for proper phasing using a phase sequence meter before starting unit.
7. Check for 120Vac at the optional control transformer and at TB-2 terminal #1 and the neutral
block (NB).
8. Check between TB-2 terminal #7 and NB for 120 vac supply for transformer #2.
9. Check between TB-2 terminal #2 and NB for 120 vac control voltage. This supplies the
compressor crank case heaters.
10. Check between TB-3 terminal #17 and #27 for 24 vac control voltage.
Operation
Hot Gas Bypass (Optional)
This option allows the system to operate at lower loads without excessive on/off compressor cycling.
The hot gas bypass option is required to be on both refrigerant circuits because of the lead/lag feature
of the controller.
This option allows passage of discharge gas into the evaporator inlet (between the TX valve and the
evaporator) which generates a false load to supplement the actual chilled water or air handler load.
Note: The hot gas bypass valve cannot generate a 100% false load.
The pressure regulating valves are a Sporlan HGBE-8-75/150-7/8 ODF on models AGZ 025 to 065
and Sporlan HGBE-8-75/150-1 1/8 ODF on AGZ 070 to 190. They are factory set to begin opening at
100 psig (R-410A) and can be changed by changing the pressure setting. The adjustment range is 75
to 150 psig. To raise the pressure setting, remove the cap on the bulb and turn the adjustment screw
clockwise. To lower the setting, turn the screw counterclockwise. Do not force the adjustment beyond
the range it is designed for, as this will damage the adjustment assembly. The regulating valve
opening point can be determined by slowly reducing the system load while observing the suction
pressure. When the bypass valve starts to open, the refrigerant line on the evaporator side of the valve
will begin to feel warm to the touch.
The bypass piping also includes a solenoid valve that is controlled by the MicroTech III controller. It
is active when the first stage of cooling on a circuit is active.
! WARNING
The hot gas line may become hot enough to cause injury. Be careful during valve checkout.
VFD Low Ambient Control (Optional)

The optional VFD fan control is used for unit operation below 35°F (2°C) down to a minimum of
-10°F (-23.3°C). The control looks at the saturated discharge temperature and varies the fan speed to
hold the temperature (pressure) at the “target” temperature. This temperature is established as an input
to a setpoint screen labeled “Sat Condenser Temp Target”.

Compressor Communications
The communication module, installed in the 20 to 40 ton compressor electrical box, provides advanced
diagnostics, protection, and communications that enhance compressor performance and reliability.
Features include motor temperature protection, scroll temperature protection, missing phase
protection, reverse phase protection, low control circuit voltage protection, short cycling detection and
alert, modbus communication to system controller, operational and fault history storage, and LED
status display.
Green/Red LEDs
OPERATION
Warnings and Alerts
A solid green LED indicates the module is powered and operation is normal.
A solid red LED indicates an internal problem with the module.
A flashing green LED communicates Warning codes. Warning codes do not result in a trip or lockout
condition.
A flashing red LED communicates Alert codes. Alert codes will result in a trip condition and
possibly a lockout condition
Warning Codes (Flashing Green LED )
Code 1 – Loss of Communication: The module will flash the green Warning LED one time indicating
the module has not communicated with the master controller for longer than 5 minutes.
Code 2 – Reserved For Future Use
Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the green Warning LED three times indicating the
compressor has short cycled more than 48 times in 24 hours.
Code 4 – Open/Shorted Scroll Thermistor: The module will flash the green Warning LED four times
indicating an open/shorted
Alert/Lockout Codes (Flashing Red LED)
Code 1 – Motor High Temperature: The module will flash the red Alert LED one time indicating the
motor is onerheating . A code 1 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30
minutes. Five consecutive Code 1 Alerts will lockout the compressor. Once the module has locked out
the compressor, a power cycle or Modbus reset command will be required for the lockout to be
cleared.
Code 2 – Open/Shorted Motor Thermistor The module will flash the red Alert LED two times
indicating the motor PTC thermistor circuit has an open/shorted thermistor chain (see Table 2). A
Code 2 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts. The Alert will reset after 30 minutes and the M2-M1
contacts will close if the resistance of the motor PTC circuit is back in the normal range. The module

will lockout the compressor and a power cycle or Modbus reset command will be required to clear the
lockout.
Code 3 – Short Cycling: The module will flash the red Alert LED three times indicating the
compressor is locked out due to short cycling. Once locked out the compressor, a power cycle or
Modbus reset command will be required to clear the lockout.
Code 4 – Scroll High Temperature; The module will flash the red Alert LED four times indicating the
over-temperature condition. A Code 4 Alert will open the M2-M1 contacts.The Alert will reset after
30 minutes. Once the module has locked out the compressor, a power cycle or Modbus reset command
will be required to clear the lockout.
Code 5 – Reserved for Future Use
Code 6 – Missing Phase: The module will flash the red Alert LED six times indicating a missing
phase. The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and the module will lockout the compressor after 10
consecutive Code 6 Alerts. Once locked out, a power cycle or Modbus reset is required.
Code 7 – Reverse Phase: The module will flash the red Alert LED seven times indicating a reverse
phase in two of the three compressor leads. The modules will lockout the compressor after one Code
7 Alert. A power cycle or Modbus reset command will be required to clear the lockout.
Code 8 – Reserved For Future Use
Code 9 – Module Low Voltage; The module will flash the red Alert LED nine times indicating low
module voltage for more than 5 seconds. . The Alert will reset after 5 minutes and the M2-M1
contacts will close if the T2-T1 voltage is above the reset value.
NOTE:If a compressor with CoreSense Communications fails in the field, the CoreSense module
should remain with the failed compressor so the manufacturer’s technicians can download the
CoreSense data to assist with determining the root cause of compressor failure.
Filter-Driers
Each refrigerant circuit is furnished with a full flow filter drier (AGZ 030D – 100D) or a replaceable
core type filter-drier (AGZ 140D – 180D). The core assembly of the replaceable core drier consists of
a filter core held tightly in the shell in a manner that allows full flow without bypass.
Pressure drop across the filter drier at full load conditions must not exceed 10 psig at full load. See
page for maximum pressure drop at other load points. Replace the filter drier if the pressure drop
exceeds maximum.
! WARNING
Pump out refrigerant before removing end flange for replacement of core(s) to remove liquid
refrigerant and lower pressure to prevent accidental blow off of cover. EPA recovery
regulations apply to this procedure.
A condenser liquid line service valve is provided for isolating the charge in the condenser, but also
serves as the point from which the liquid line can be pumped out. With the line free of refrigerant, the
filter-drier core(s) can be easily replaced.
System Adjustment
To maintain peak performance at full load operation, the system superheat and liquid subcooling may
require adjustment. Read the following subsections closely to determine if adjustment is required.
Liquid Line Sight Glass
The color of the moisture indicator is an indication of the dryness of the system and is extremely
important when the system has been serviced. Immediately after the system has been opened for
service, the element may indicate a wet condition. It is recommended that the equipment operate for

about 12 hours to allow the system to reach equilibrium before deciding if the system requires a
change of drier cores.
Bubbles in the sight glass at constant full load indicates a shortage of refrigerant, a plugged filter-drier,
or a restriction in the liquid line. However, it is not unusual to see bubbles in the sight glass during
changing load conditions.
Refrigerant Charging
Liquid line subcooling at the liquid shut-off valve should be between 15 and 20 degrees F at full load.
If the unit is at steady full load operation and bubbles are visible in the sight glass, then check liquid
subcooling.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
The expansion valve performs one specific function. It keeps the evaporator supplied with the proper
amount of refrigerant to satisfy the load conditions.
NOTE: Before adjusting superheat, check that unit charge is correct and liquid line sight glass is full
with no bubbles and that the circuit is operating under stable, full load conditions.
The suction superheat for the suction leaving the evaporator is set at the factory for 8 to 12 degrees F
at full load. To have full rated unit performance, the superheat must be about 8 degrees F at 95°F
outdoor ambient temperature.
Crankcase Heaters
The scroll compressors are equipped with externally mounted band heaters located at the oil sump
level. The function of the heater is to keep the temperature in the crankcase high enough to prevent
refrigerant from migrating to the crankcase and condensing in the oil during off-cycle.
Power must be supplied to the heaters 8 hours before starting the compressors.
Evaporator
Models AGZ 025D through 130D
The evaporator is a compact, high efficiency, dual circuit, brazed, plate-to-plate type heat exchanger
consisting of parallel stainless steel plates.
The evaporator is protected with an electric resistance heater and insulated with 3/4" (19mm) thick
closed-cell polyurethane insulation. This combination provides freeze protection down to -20°F (-
29°C) ambient air temperature.
The water side working pressure is 363 psig (2503 kPa). Evaporators are designed and constructed
according to, and listed by, Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
NOTE: This product is equipped with a copper-brazed series 304 stainless steel plate evaporator. The
water or other fluid used in these evaporators must be clean and non-corrosive to the materials used in
the evaporator. The use of non-compatible fluids can void the equipment warranty. If the compatibility
of the fluid with the evaporator is in question, a professional water quality consultant should
administer the proper testing and evaluate compatibility.
Models AGZ 140D through 180D

The evaporator is direct expansion, shell-and-tube type with water flowing in the baffled shell side and
refrigerant flowing through the tubes. Two independent refrigerant circuits within the evaporator
serve the unit's dual refrigerant circuits.
The evaporator is wrapped with an electric resistance heater cable and insulated with 3/4" (19mm)
thick vinyl nitrate polymer sheet insulation, protecting against water freeze-up at ambient air
temperatures to -20°F (-29°C). An ambient air thermostat controls the heater cable. The fitted and
glued-in-place insulation has a K factor of 0.28 Btu in/hr ft2 °F at 75°F.

The refrigerant (tube) side maximum working pressure is 300 psig (2068 kPa). The water side
working pressure is 152 psig (1048 kPa). Each evaporator is designed, constructed, inspected, and
stamped according to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Double
thickness insulation is available as an option.
Phase Voltage Monitor (Optional)

Factory settings are as follows:
•• Trip Delay Time, 2 seconds
•• Voltage Setting, set at nameplate voltage.
•• Restart Delay Time, 60 seconds

Unit Maintenance
General
On initial start-up and periodically during operation, it will be necessary to perform certain routine
service checks. Among these are checking the liquid line sight glasses, taking condensing and suction
pressure readings, and checking to see that the unit has normal superheat and subcooling readings. A
recommended maintenance schedule is located at the end of this section.
Compressor Maintenance
The scroll compressors are fully hermetic and require no maintenance other than checking oil level.
The compressors in this unit use POE lubricant. POE lubricant is required with refrigerant R-410A.
Do not use mineral oil. See discussion of POE Lubricants in Service.
Electrical Terminals
! DANGER Condensers
The condensers are air-cooled and constructed of
Electric shock hazard. Turn off all power
3/8" (9.5mm) O.D. internally finned copper tubes
before continuing with following service.
bonded in a staggered pattern into louvered
aluminum fins. Maintenance consists primarily of the routine removal of dirt and debris from the
outside surface of the fins and repairing any fin damage. Daikin Applied recommends the use of
foaming coil cleaners available at most air conditioning supply outlets. Use caution when applying
such cleaners as they can contain potentially harmful chemicals. Care should be taken not to damage
the fins during cleaning. The coils should be thoroughly rinsed to remove any cleaner residue.
If the service technician determines that the refrigerant circuit contains noncondensables, recovery can
be required, strictly following Clean Air Act regulations governing refrigerant discharge to the
atmosphere. The Schrader purge valve is located on the vertical coil headers on both sides of the unit
at the end opposite the control box. Decorative panels cover the condenser coils and must be removed
for servicing. Recover with the unit off, after a shutdown of 15 minutes or longer, to allow air to
collect at the top of the coil. Restart and run the unit for a brief period. If necessary, shut the unit off
and repeat the procedure. Follow national and local regulations regarding refrigerant venting and
reclamation when removing refrigerant from the unit.
The fan motor bearings are permanently lubricated and no further lubrication is required. Excessive
fan motor bearing noise is an indication of a potential bearing failure.
Condensers with Electrofin® Coating

Documented routine quarterly coil cleaning of Electrofin coils is required to maintain the coating
warranty. The cleaning procedure can be downloaded from the Electrofin web site
www.luvata.com/electrofin ,click on Procedures for Cleaning
Optional High Ambient Control Panel

Consists of exhaust fan with rain hood, two inlet screens with filters, necessary controls and wiring to
allow operation to 125°F (52°C). The option can be factory or field installed as a kit.
• It must be supplied on units operating at ambient temperatures of 105°F (40.6°C) and above.
• It is automatically included on units with fan VFD (low ambient option).
• Check inlet filters periodically and clean as required. Verify that the fan is operational.

Liquid Line Sight Glass
The refrigerant sight glasses should be observed periodically (a weekly observation should be
adequate.) A clear glass of liquid indicates that there is subcooled refrigerant charge in the system.
Bubbling refrigerant in the sight glass, during stable run conditions, indicates that the system can be
short of refrigerant charge. Refrigerant gas flashing in the sight glass could also indicate an excessive
pressure drop in the liquid line, possibly due to a clogged filter-drier or a restriction elsewhere in the
liquid line.
See Table 22 on page 77 for maximum allowable pressure drops. If subcooling is low, add charge to
clear the sight glass. If subcooling is normal (15 to 20 degrees F) and flashing is visible in the sight
glass, check the pressure drop across the filter-drier. Subcooling should be checked at full load with
70°F (21.1°C) ambient temperature, stable conditions, and all fans running.
An element inside the sight glass indicates the moisture condition corresponding to a given element
color. If the sight glass does not indicate a dry condition after about 12 hours of operation, the circuit
should be pumped down and the filter-drier changed or verify moisture content by performing an acid
test on the compressor oil.
Planned Maintenance Schedule

MONTHLY ANNUAL
OPERATION WEEKLY
(Note 1) (Note 2)
General
Complete unit log and review (Note 3) X
Visually inspect unit for loose or damaged components X
Inspect thermal insulation for integrity X
Clean and paint as required X
Electrical
Check terminals for tightness, tighten as necessary X
Clean control panel interior X
Visually inspect components for signs of overheating X
Verify compressor heater operation X
Test and calibrate equipment protection and operating controls X
Megger compressor motor * X
Refrigeration
Leak test X
Check sight glasses for clear flow X
Check filter-drier pressure drop (see manual for spec) X
Perform compressor vibration test X
Acid test oil sample X
Condenser (air-cooled)
Clean condenser coils (Note 4) X
Check fan blades for tightness on shaft (Note 5) X
Check fans for loose rivets and cracks X
Check coil fins for damage X
Notes:
1. Monthly operations include all weekly operations.
2. Annual (or spring start-up) operations includes all weekly and monthly operations.
3. Log readings can be taken daily for a higher level of unit observation.
4. Coil cleaning can be required more frequently in areas with a high level of airborne particles.
5. Be sure fan motors are electrically locked out.
6. * Never Megger motors while they are in a vacuum to avoid damage to the motor.

Service
R-410A
Refrigerant Terminology
Bubble Point: The temperature/pressure where bubbles first appear when heat is added to a liquid
refrigerant. Used to measure sub-cooling.
Dew Point: The temperature/pressure where droplets first appear when heat is removed from a
refrigerant gas. Used to measure superheat.
Fractionalization: A change in refrigerant composition due to the tendency of the higher pressure
refrigerant to leak at a faster rate, should a system have leakage from a static two-phase region.
Glide: The total difference of Dew and Bubble Point at a specific condition. Mid-Point or Mean:
Measurement half way between Dew and Bubble Points.
Miscibility: The ability of a refrigerant and oil to mix and flow together.
Solubility: The effect of refrigerant on the viscosity of a lubricant.
Safety
Comparable to R-22; ANSI/ASHRAE safety group A1.
Always carry and be familiar with MSDS information for R-410a.
Store refrigerant in clean, dry area out of direct sunlight.
Never heat or store cylinders above 125° F. Note vehicle precautions!
Never tamper with cylinder valves or pressure relief valves. (Typical relief for R-410A is 525 psig).
Never refill disposable cylinders.
Verify cylinder hook-up.
Verify cylinder label and color code match. R-410A is rose/light maroon. Must be DOT approved, R-
410A with 400 psig rating. Open cylinders slowly.
Avoid rough handling of cylinders and secure as appropriate. Cap when not in use.
Do not overfill recovery cylinders or overcharge units.
Check gauge calibration before every use and manifold set for leaks regularly.
Be aware of pneumatic and possible hydrostatic pressure potentials.
Never pressurize systems with oxygen or ref/air mix. R-410A, R-407C, R-134A, & R-22 are
flammable with low air mix.
Wear protective clothing. Impervious gloves and splash goggles should be worn.
Avoid contact with liquid refrigerant (R-410A -60.8°F @ atms.) due to corrosion and freezing hazards.
Avoid exposure to vapors. 1000 ppm/8 hr.
Evacuate areas in cases of large releases. R-410A is heavier than air and can cause asphyxiation,
narcotic and cardiac sensation effects.
Evacuate systems and break vacuum (0 psig) with nitrogen before welding or brazing.
Always ventilate work areas before using open flames. Exposure to open flames or glowing metal will
form toxic hydrofluoric acid & carbonyl fluoride. No smoking!

Make sure all tools, equipment, and replacement components are rated for the refrigerant used.
POE Lubricants
! WARNING
POE oil must be handled carefully using proper protective equipment (gloves, eye protection,
etc.) The oil must not come in contact with certain polymers (e.g. PVC), as it may absorb
moisture from this material. Also, do not use oil or refrigerant additives in the system.
POE type oil is used for compressor lubrication. This type of oil is extremely hydroscopic which
means it will quickly absorb moisture if exposed to air and may form acids that can be harmful to the
chiller. Avoid prolonged exposure of POE oil to the atmosphere to prevent this problem. For more
details on acceptable oil types, contact your Daikin Applied service representative.
It is important that only the manufacturer’s recommended oils be used. Acceptable POE oil types are:
• CPI/Lubrizol Emkarate RL32-3 MAF
• Exxon/Mobil EAL Arctic 22 CC*
• Hatcol 22CC*
• Everest 22CC*
• Copeland Ultra 32-3 MAF
• Parker Emkarate RL32-3MAF
• Virginia LE323MAF
• Nu Calgon 4314-66
Note - * These types of oils can only be used as “Top Off” oils. This is defined as adding less than
50% of the total amount of oil in the unit.
Pump the lubricant into the unit through a closed transfer system. Avoid overcharging the unit.
Use only new sealed metal containers of oil to insure quality.
Buy smaller containers to prevent waste and contamination.
Use only filter driers designed for POE and check pressure drops frequently.
Test for acid and color at least annually. Change filter driers if acid or high moisture (> 200 ppm) is
indicated (< 100 ppm typical).
Evacuate to 500 microns and hold test to insure systems are dry.
Control and Alarm Settings

The software that controls the operation of the unit is factory-set for operation with R-410A, taking
into account that the pressure/temperature relationship differs from R-22. The software functionality is
the same for either refrigerant.
Refrigerant Charging
The AGZ units have a condenser coil design with approximately 15% of the coil tubes located in a
subcooler section of the coil to achieve liquid cooling to within 5°F (3°C) of the outdoor air
temperature when all condenser fans are operating.
Once the subcooler is filled, extra charge will not lower the liquid temperature and does not help
system capacity or efficiency.

If a unit is low on refrigerant, you must first determine the cause before attempting to recharge the
unit. Locate and repair any refrigerant leaks. Soap works well to show bubbles at medium size leaks
but electronic leak detectors are needed to locate small leaks.
Charging or check valves should always be used on charging hoses to limit refrigerant loss and prevent
frostbite. Ball valve type recommended.
Charge to 80-85% of normal charge before starting the compressors.
Charging procedure. The units are factory-charged with R-410A. Use the following procedure if
recharging in the field is necessary:
To prevent fractionalization, liquid must be charged from the refrigerant cylinder, unless charging the
entire cylinder contents.
The charge can be added at any load condition between 25 to 100 percent load per circuit, but at least
two fans per refrigerant circuit should be operating if possible.
Start the system and observe operation.
1. Trim the charge to the recommended liquid line sub-cooling (approximately 14-20 degrees F
typical).
2. Verify the suction superheat (10 degrees F for EEVs and 10 – 12 degrees F for TXVs) at full load
conditions.
Use standard charging procedures (liquid only) to top off the charge.
Check the sight glass to be sure there is no refrigerant flashing.
With outdoor temperatures above 60°F (15.6°C), all condenser fans should be operating and the liquid
line temperature should be within 5°F to 10°F (2.8°C to 5.6°C) of the outdoor air temperature. At 25-
50% load, the liquid line temperature should be within 5°F (2.8°C) of outdoor air temperature with all
fans on. At 75-100% load the liquid line temperature should be within 10°F (5.6°C) of outdoor air
temperature with all fans on.
It may be necessary to add refrigerant through the compressor suction. Because the refrigerant leaving
the cylinder must be a liquid, exercise care to avoid damage to the compressor by using a flow
restrictor. A sight glass can be connected between the charging hose and the compressor. It can be
adjusted to have liquid leave the cylinder and vapor enter the compressor.
Overcharging of refrigerant will raise the compressor discharge pressure due to filling of the
condenser tubes with excess refrigerant.
Service
With R-410A, fractionalization, if due to leaks and recharge has a minimal effect on performance or
operation.
Special tools will be required due to higher refrigerant pressures with R-410A. Oil-less/hp recovery
units, hp recovery cylinders (DOT approved w/525# relief), gauge manifold 30”-250 psi low/0-800 psi
high, hoses w/800 psi working & 4,000 psi burst.
All filter driers and replacement components must be rated POE oils and for the refrigerant pressure
(R-410A 600psig typical).
R-410A compressor internal relief is 600-650 psid.
Brazed connections only. No StayBrite or solder connections (solder should never be used with any
refrigerant). K or L type refrigeration tubing only. Use nitrogen purge. Higher R-410A pressures and
smaller molecule size make workmanship more critical.

R-410A must be charged from cylinder as a liquid unless entire cylinder is used. Use a Refrigerant
flow restrictor if charging liquid to suction or to a system at pressure below a saturated temperature of
32° F.
EPA recovery and handling requirements for R-410A are the same as R-22.
Cooling the recovery cylinder will speed recovery and lessen stress on recovery equipment.
! WARNING
Service on this equipment is to be performed by qualified refrigeration personnel familiar with
equipment operation, maintenance, correct servicing procedures, and the safety hazards inherent
in this work. Causes for repeated tripping of equipment protection controls must be investigated
and corrected.
Disconnect all power before doing any service inside the unit.
Servicing this equipment must comply with the requirements set forth by the EPA in regards to
refrigerant reclamation and venting.
Filter-Driers
Replace the filter-drier any time excessive pressure drop is read across the filter-drier
and/or when bubbles occur in the sight glass with normal subcooling. The maximum recommended
pressure drops across the filter-drier are shown below.
Table 22, Filter-Drier Pressure Drop
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED
PERCENT CIRCUIT
PRESSUREDROP ACROSS
The filter-drier should also be changed if the moisture LOADING (%)
FILTER DRIER PSIG (KPA)
indicating liquid line sight glass indicates excess 100% 10 (69)
moisture in the system. 75% 8 (55.2)
50% 5 (34.5)
During the first few months of operation the filter- 25% 4 (27.6)
drier replacement can be necessary if the pressure drop across the filter-drier exceeds the values listed
in the paragraph above. Any residual particles from the condenser tubing, compressor and
miscellaneous components are swept by the refrigerant to the liquid line and caught by the filter-drier.
Battery
The microprocessor has a battery located behind the clear plastic bezel. It is a BR2032 with a
minimum life of 2 years unpowered. It would be prudent to replace it on a 2-year cycle. There is no
indication of an eminent failure.
Liquid Line Solenoid Valve

The liquid line solenoid valves that shut off refrigerant flow in the event of a power failure do not
normally require any maintenance. The solenoids can, however, require replacement of the solenoid
coil or of the entire valve assembly.
The solenoid coil can be checked to see that the stem is magnetized when energized by touching a
screwdriver to the top of the stem. If there is no magnetization, either the coil is bad or there is no
power to the coil.
The solenoid coil can be removed from the valve body without opening the refrigerant piping after
pumpdown. For personal safety, shut off and lock out the unit power.
The coil can then be removed from the valve body by simply removing a nut or snap-ring located at
the top of the coil. The coil can then be slipped off its mounting stud for replacement.
To replace the entire solenoid valve follow the steps involved when changing a filter-drier.

Evaporator
The evaporators on AGZ-D models 030 - 130 are brazed plate type, and on models 140, 160, 180 and 190
they are shell-and-tube type. Other than cleaning and testing, no service work should be required on the
evaporator.

AGZ-D Troubleshooting Chart
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE CORRECTIVE STEPS
1. Main switch. 1. Close switch.
2. Check electrical circuits and motor windings for
shorts or grounds. Investigate for possible overloading.
2. Fuse blown. circuit breakers open
Replace fuse or reset breakers after fault is corrected.
Check for loose or corroded connections.
3. Overloads are auto-reset. Check unit closely when
3. Thermal overloads tripped
unit comes back on line. Allow time for auto-reset.
Compressor Will
Not Run 4. Defective contactor or coil. 4. Repair or replace
5. Determine type and cause of shutdown and correct
5. System shutdown by equipment protection devices
it before resetting equipment protection switch.
6. No cooling required 6. None. Wait until unit calls for cooling.
7. Liquid line solenoid will not open 7. Repair or replace solenoid coil. Check wiring.
8. Motor electrical trouble 8. Check motor for opens, shorts, or burnout.
9. Loose wiring 9. Check all wire junctions. Tighten all terminal screws.
1. Low or no refrigerant charge 1. Repair and recharge
2. Compressor running in reverse 2. Check unit and compressor for correct phasing
Compressor
3. Improper piping support on suction or discharge 3. Relocate, add, or remove hangers
Noisy Or Vibrating
4. Worn compressor isolator bushing 4. Replace
5. Worn Compressor 5. Replace
1. Extract the noncondensables with approved
1. Noncondensables in system
procedures.
2. System overcharged with refrigerant 2. Remove excess, check liquid subcooling.
High Discharge 3. Optional discharge shutoff valve partially closed 3. Open valve.
Pressure 4. FanTrol wiring not correct 4. Check FanTrol wiring.
5. Fan not running 5. Check electrical circuit, Check fan motor.
6. Dirty condenser coil 6. Clean coil.
7. Air recirculation 7. Correct.
1. Refrigerant flood back 1. Correct.
2. Shield coil from direct wind, Wind guards are
2. Wind blowing into coil at low ambient
available.
3. Faulty condenser temperature regulation 3. Check condenser control operation.
Low Discharge
4. Insufficient refrigerant in system 4. Check for leaks. Repair and add charge.
Pressure 5. Low suction pressure 5. See corrective steps for Low Suction Pressure.
6. See corrective steps for Compressor Will Not Stage
6. Only one compressor operating
Up.
1. Excessive water temperature 1. Check control settings.
High Suction 2. Excessive load 2. Reduce load or add additional equipment.
Pressure 3. Expansion valve overfeeding 3. Check remote bulb. Regulate superheat.
4. Compressors running in reverse 4. Check for proper phasing.
1. Rapid load swings 1. Stabilize load.
2. Check for leaks, repair, add charge. Check liquid
2. Lack of refrigerant
sight glass.
3. Clogged liquid line filter drier 3. Check pressure drop across filter drier. Replace.
4. Expansion valve malfunctioning 4. Check and reset for proper superheat.
5. Check means for regulating condenser
Low Suction 5. Condensing temperature too low
temperature.
Pressure 6. See corrective steps for Compressor Staging
6. Compressor will not unload
Intervals Too Low.
7. Insufficient water flow 7. Adjust flow.
8. Take pressure drop across vessel and contact
8. Evaporator head ring gasket slippage
factory to obtain design pressure drop for that vessel.
9. Evaporator dirty 9. Clean chemically.
1. Defective capacity control 1. Replace.
Compressor Will 2. Faulty thermostat stage or broken wire 2. Replace.
Not Stage Up
3. Stages not set for application 3. Reset thermostat setting for application.
1. Thermostat control band not set properly 1. Set control band wider.
Compressor
2. Faulty water temperature sensor 2. Replace.
Staging Intervals
Too Short 3. Insufficient water flow 3. Adjust flow.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE CORRECTIVE STEPS
1. Oil hang-up in piping 1. Review refrigerant piping and correct.
2. Low oil level 2. Check and add oil.
3. Loose fitting on oil line 3. Check and tighten system.
Compressor Oil 4. Level too high 4. Adjust thermal expansion valve.
Level Too High
5. Insufficient water flow - Level too high 5. Adjust flow.
Or Too Low
6. Excessive liquid in crankcase - Level too high 6. Check crankcase heater. Reset expansion valve
for higher superheat. Check liquid line solenoid valve
operation.
7. Short cycling 7. Stabilize load or increase staging interval.
1. Lack of refrigerant 1. Check for leaks and repair. Add refrigerant
Compressor
2. Suction superheat too high 2. Adjust superheat.
Loses Oil
3. Crankcase heater burnout 3. Replace crankcase heater.
1. Low voltage during high load conditions 1. Check supply voltage for excessive line drop.
2. Defective or grounded wiring in motor 2. Replace compressor motor.
Motor Overload
Relays or Circuit 3. Loose power wiring or burnt contactors 3. Check all connections and tighten.
Breakers Open 4. High condenser temperature 4. See corrective steps for High Discharge Pressure.
5. Power line fault causing unbalanced voltage 5. Check supply voltage. Notify power company. Do
not start until fault is corrected..
1. Operating beyond design conditions 1. Add facilities so conditions are within allowable
limits.
Compressor 2. Discharge valve partially shut 2. Open valve.
Thermal 3. Blown compressor internal gasket 3. Replace gasket.
Protection Switch
Open 4. Voltage range or imbalance 4. Check and correct.
5. High superheat 5. Adjust to correct superheat.
6. Compressor bearing failure 6. Replace compressor .

Daikin Applied Training and Development
Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin Applied equipment, its care should
be a high priority. For training information on all Daikin Applied HVAC products, please visit us at
www.DaikinApplied.com and click on Training, or call 540-248-9646 to speak with the Training
Department.
Warranty
All Daikin Applied equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including
Limited Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Applied sales representative for warranty details.
To find your local Daikin Applied representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
Aftermarket Services
To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).
To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.
This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-
date product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.
© 2014 Daikin Applied • www.DaikinApplied.com • (800) 432-1342 OMM 1166-2 (6/14)

Daikin Applied Agz 025D 190D

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Daikin Applied Agz 025D 190D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Maintenance Manual IM 1165

Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Chiller Group: Chillers

Date: March 20, 2013

Supersedes: July 30, 2012

AGZ025DH - AGZ190DH (Rev 0A), Packaged Chillers

© 2013 Daikin Applied

*AHRI Certification and ETL Listing apply to 60Hz models only

Note: Cover photograph is an AGZ190D with standard protective coil grilles.

General Description Figure 1: Suggested Pushing Arrangment

Unit Placement Air Clearance

charts for an adjacent building. For perforated screening walls,

Distance = 4ft Distance = 6ft

Power Increase (AGZ140-180)

Figure 6: Case 1 Adjustment Factors (AGZ190D)

Power Increase (AGZ190)

Distance = 4ft Distance = 5ft 0.0

Distance = 4ft Distance = 5ft Distance = 7ft

For models AGZ 025-100: use 4 feet between units. For

Figure 13: Case 5 Adjustment Factors (AGZ025D-070D)

Distance = 4 ft Distance = 5 ft Distance = 6 ft

Power Increase (AGZ025-070)

Power Increase (AGZ140-190)

Distance = 5 ft Distance = 6 ft Distance = 8 ft POE Lubricants

Figure 17: Typical Piping, Brazed-Plate Evaporator (models AGZ025D-130D)

Table 4: Ethylene Glycol Factors Table 5: Propylene Glycol Factors

Figure 19: Location of Connections Evaporator installed below outdoor unit:

AGZ025-130 (4-6-8) FAN UNITS • 30 ft. Maximum Vertical Distance

Installation Tips and Guidelines

Table 9: Recommended Liquid Line Size, R-410A

Wiring for AGZ-Remote Evaporators Sensor Wiring

sensors must be relocated to the Suction Line piping at the

water connections, at the designated inlet and outlet water

(863) (863) (863) (863)

There is one suction line refrigerant temperature sensor per

ROUTE COPPER TUBE PIPING

LIQUID #2 LEAVING WATER BALL VALVE

BRAZE CONNECTIONS ON EVAP ARE STAINLESS STEEL,

SUCTION #2 FILTER DRIER SHELL

HOTGAS BYPASS LINE MUST ENTER

490 369 400

Figure 24: AGZ060D-130D Brazed Plate Evaporator Dimensions

2X Suction 2x Liquid 2x Water 2x Water

B1 & B2 C1 & C2 T1 & T2 W1 & W2

Figure 25: AGZ140D-190D Shell and Tube Evaporator Dimension Drawing

ISOLATOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF UNIT BASE

BLANK PANELS ARE

POWER ENTRY POINTS

POWER ENTRY POINTS 2413

POWER ENTRY POINTS 2414

127 19.6 2X 2.5

POWER ENTRY POINTS 2414

ISOLATOR MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS ARE ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF UNIT

LIQUID CIR. 2 SUCTION

BLANK PANELS ARE

POWER ENTRY POINTS 1094 2409

POWER ENTRY POINTS

POWER ENTRY POINTS 2413

51 127 FIELD CONTROL

610 165 167

1069 2450 1719

14.3 1227 HGBP

POWER ENTRY POINTS

378 2286 1826 1719 315 LIFTING WEIGHT.

Telephone Number: __ Modem Number: _